MA5100 5103 Operation Manual

HUAWEI
1. Basic Operation
2. Service Configuration
3. Maintenance Operation
4. Appendix
SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service Access Module

Operation Manual
V200R002

Operation Manual
Manual Version
T2-051654-20040112-C-2.22
Product Version
V200R002
BOM
31161054
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2003 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Version
This manual is written to guide your operation on the SmartAX MA5100 and MA5103
Multi-service Access Module V200R002 (referred to as the MA5100 and MA5103
respectively hereinafter).
Related Manuals
The following user documents are shipped together with the SmartAX MA5100.
Manual
Content
SmartAX MA5100 Multi-service Access

Module Technical Manual
It provides an overall introduction to the MA5100, including the

software structure, hardware structure, applications and technical
specifications.
SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service

Access Module Operation Manual
It guides you to configure the system parameters and typical

applications of the MA5100 and MA5103.

Module Installation Manual
It guides you to install the MA5100, including the installation of the

cables, power system and various boards.

Access Module Command Reference
It provides all commands available in the MA5100/MA5103, as

well as the usage of the command and examples. The Command
Manual is provided only in the documentation CD-ROM that is
shipped with the MA5100/MA5103 device.
SmartAX Documentation CD-ROM
It provides the user documentation in HTML and PDF formats to

facilitate retrieve.
The following user documents are shipped together with the MA5103.
Manual
Content

Module User Manual
It provides an overall introduction to the MA5103.

Access Module Operation Manual
It guides you to configure the system parameters and typical

applications of the MA5100 and MA5103.

Access Module Command Reference
It provides all commands available in the MA5100/MA5103, as

well as the usage of the command and examples. The Command
Manual is provided only in the documentation CD-ROM that is
shipped with the MA5100/MA5103 device.
SmartAX Documentation CD-ROM
It provides the user documentation in HTML and PDF formats to

facilitate retrieve.
Organization of the Manual

This manual consists of four parts:
Part 1 Basic Operation introduces the basic configurations of the MA5100/5103,
including the configuration of maintenance terminal, command line functions, user
management, system management, board management, clock management,
bandwidth management, PVC management and NMS management.
Part 2 Service Configuration introduces the configuration of service boards, the
configuration procedures, networking modes and examples, including the configuration
of ATM-DSLAM, IP-DSLAM, multicast, LAN interconnection, CES, frame relay, IMA,
local cascading and remote cascading services.
Part 3 Maintenance Operation introduces the detailed operations in routing
maintenance of the MA5100/MA5103, including the loading and backup of program
and data, switchover of active/standby boards, alarm management, OAM, broadband
test and environment monitor functions.
Part 4 Appendix gives the acronyms and abbreviations related to the manual.
Intended Readers
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z
Maintenance staff of the SmartAX MA5100/5103;
Administrators and technicians operating with the MA5100/5103;
System engineers.
Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow
Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface
Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New
Terminal Display is in Courier New.
II. Command conventions

Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is
selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum
of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.
III. GUI conventions

Convention
Description
<>
Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click <OK> button.
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square
brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,

[File/Create/Folder].
IV. Keyboard operation

Format
Description
<Key>
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example, <Enter>,
<Tab>, <Backspace>, or <A>.
<Key1+Key2>
Press the keys concurrently. For example, <Ctrl+Alt+A> means the three keys
should be pressed concurrently.
<Key1, Key2>
Press the keys in turn. For example, <Alt, A> means the two keys should be
pressed in turn.
V. Mouse operation
Action
Description
Click
Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click
Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag
Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
VI. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in this document to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary description
HUAWEI
SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service Access

Module
Operation Manual
Part 1 Basic Operation
Operation Manual Basic Operation

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Connecting and Configuring Serial Port Terminal ............................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Configuring Local Serial Port Terminal ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Configuring Remote Serial Port Terminal ............................................................... 1-7
1.2 Connecting and Configuring Telnet Terminal .................................................................... 1-7
1.2.1 Connecting Outband Maintenance Terminal .......................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Connecting Inband Maintenance Terminal ............................................................. 1-9
1.2.3 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal ................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 2 Basic Operations of Command Line.......................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview of Command Line .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Basic Operations of MA5100 Command Line ................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 Command Modes .................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.2 Changing the Terminal Language........................................................................... 2-3
2.2.3 Clearing the Screen Display.................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.4 Configuring Terminal Timeout................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.5 Displaying History Command.................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.6 Displaying Online Help Information......................................................................... 2-4
2.2.7 Configuring the Help Mode ..................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.8 Configuring Interactive Input of Commands............................................................ 2-6
2.2.9 Scrolling the Terminal Display................................................................................. 2-6
Chapter 3 User Management........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Managing the Users........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Adding a User.......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Deleting a User........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.3 Modifying User Attributes ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.4 Displaying User Information .................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.5 Controlling the Login of a Telnet User .................................................................... 3-6
Chapter 4 System Management ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Basic Operations................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Setting and Displaying System Time ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Displaying System Version ..................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Displaying the Occupation Rate of System Memory............................................... 4-3
4.1.4 Displaying CPU Occupation Rate ........................................................................... 4-3
4.1.5 Displaying System MAC Address ........................................................................... 4-3
4.1.6 Displaying Log......................................................................................................... 4-3

Table of Contents
4.1.7 Configuring Serial Port Baudrate ............................................................................ 4-4

4.2 System Management......................................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.1 Resetting the System .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Saving the Configuration......................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Erasing the Configuration from Flash Memory ....................................................... 4-5
4.2.4 Holding a User Terminal ......................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.5 Testing Network Connectivity.................................................................................. 4-5
Chapter 5 Board Configuration.................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Operation Procedures........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.1 Adding a Board........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2.2 Confirming a Board ................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3 Deleting a Board ..................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 Prohibiting/Unprohibiting a Board ........................................................................... 5-5
5.2.5 Resetting a Board ................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.6 Configuring Port Type ............................................................................................. 5-6
Chapter 6 Clock Configuration .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Introduction to Clock Synchronization ............................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Clock Synchronization of the MA5100............................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Configuring the Clock ........................................................................................................ 6-2
6.3.1 Setting a Clock Source............................................................................................ 6-3
6.3.2 Setting Clock Source Priority .................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.3 Displaying CKMB Port Status ................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.4 Displaying CKMB Work Mode................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.5 Displaying Clock Source State................................................................................ 6-6
6.4 Configuring Tx Clock ......................................................................................................... 6-6
Chapter 7 Traffic Management..................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Service Type ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Traffic Rank........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.3 Principles for Traffic Control .............................................................................................. 7-3
7.4 Configuring Traffic Control Strategy .................................................................................. 7-4
7.5 Configuring Traffic Table ................................................................................................... 7-5
Chapter 8 PVC Configuration....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Configuration Procedures .................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Defining PVC Types................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 Configuring Traffic Types ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.3 Displaying Board Bandwidth ................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Configuring the PVC ............................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Remarks............................................................................................................................. 8-4
Chapter 9 NMS Configuration ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Configuring Outband NMS................................................................................................. 9-1
ii

Table of Contents
9.1.1 Configuring IP Address for the ETH Port ................................................................ 9-2

9.1.2 Configuring Outband NMS Route ........................................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Configuring Ethernet Firewall.................................................................................. 9-4
9.1.4 Adding an NMS Workstation ................................................................................... 9-6
9.2 Configuring Inband NMS ................................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.1 Adding ATM Network Interface ............................................................................... 9-6
9.2.2 Configuring ARP Connection .................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.3 Configuring NMS Route .......................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.4 Configuring the Firewall ........................................................................................ 9-10
9.2.5 Adding an NMS Workstation ................................................................................. 9-10
9.3 Configuring NMS Workstation ......................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.1 Adding an NMS Workstation ................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.2 Deleting an NMS Workstation ............................................................................... 9-11
9.3.3 Activating/Deactivating an NMS Workstation........................................................ 9-12
9.3.4 Displaying NMS Workstation Information ............................................................. 9-12
9.3.5 Modifying an NMS Workstation............................................................................. 9-13
9.4 Configuration Example .................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.1 Configuring Inband NMS in ATM-DSLAM Networking.......................................... 9-13
9.4.2 Configuring Inband NMS in IP-DSLAM Networking............................................. 9-15
iii

Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration

This chapter describes in detail the various methods to configure and maintain the
MA5100 Multi-Service Access Modules (referred to as the MA5100 hereinafter) of
Huawei.
To configure and maintain the MA5100 locally, you need to connect the maintenance
terminal (a PC or a Character Mode Terminal) to the serial port (CON) on the MA5100
through an RS-232 cable, and then log in to the MA5100.
To configure and maintain the MA5100 remotely, you can use the Telnet Client program
to set up a connection with the MA5100 through a LAN or WAN, or through an inband
network management channel.
The commands for configuration and maintenance in the above two methods are the
same.
1.1 Connecting and Configuring Serial Port Terminal

Depending on the physical location of the maintenance terminal, the serial port terminal
can be a local one or a remote one. The following describes respectively the
connection and configuration of these two types of terminals.
1.1.1 Configuring Local Serial Port Terminal

Local serial port terminal means the maintenance terminal that is connected to the
maintenance serial port (CON) on the MMX of the MA5100 through RS-232 serial cable,
as shown in Figure 1-1.
MMX
CON
MON
ETH
Serial port
CLK IN0
CLK IN1
RS232 cable
Maintenance
terminal
MA5100
Figure 1-1 Connecting local maintenance terminal through the serial port
1-1

1)
Select [Start/Program/Accessories/HyperTerminal] on the terminal to set up the

connection, as shown in Figure 1-2. Select the serial port number that is actually
used by the PC. Assume it is Port 2.
Figure 1-2 Selecting the serial port number

2)
Click <OK> as shown in Figure 1-2 to set the properties for COM2, as shown in
Figure 1-3. [Bits per second]: 9600, [Data bits]: 8, [Parity]: None, [Stop bits]: 1,
[Flow control]: None.
1-2

Figure 1-3 Setting the serial port properties

3)
Click <OK>, and then the HyperTerminal window appears, as shown in Figure 1-4.
1-3

Figure 1-4 Appearance of HyperTerminal window

4)
Select [File/Properties], and set [Emulation] as "ANSI" or "Auto detect" in the

[Settings] page. See Figure 1-5:
1-4

Figure 1-5 Setting the emulation type

5)
Click <ASCII Setup>, set the [Line delay] and [Character delay] for [ASCII
sending] as 50ms, as shown in Figure 1-6.
1-5

Figure 1-6 Setting ASCII
Note:
z
"Character delay" controls the display speed of each character when the test is shown in the
HyperTerminal window.
"Line delay" controls the time interval between the displays of two lines. When the delay is too short, it
may result in character loss. So if the display is not normal, you should modify the two values.
6)
Click <OK> to return to the HyperTerminal window as shown in Figure 1-4, and
input the user name and password to log in. The default administrator is root, and
password is admin. If no prompt appears, click the
then call again.
icon in the window, and
If the login fails, check the physical connection and terminal configuration, and then try
to log in again.
1-6

1.1.2 Configuring Remote Serial Port Terminal

Remote serial port terminal means the maintenance terminal that is far away from the
MA5100, and is connected to the MA5100 through a Modem and over the PSTN, as
shown in Figure 1-7.
MMX
Modem
CON
Telephone line
MON
ETH
CLK IN0
CLK IN1
MA5100
PSTN
Modem
Maintenance
terminal
Figure 1-7 Connecting remote maintenance terminal through the serial port
Make sure the Modem that connects with the MA5100 is powered on before the
MA5100 is powered on, and then wait for the call initiated from the remote Modem.
After the dialup connection has been established, you can start the configuration on the
terminal. The detailed procedures are the same as those described in Section 1.1.1.
1.2 Connecting and Configuring Telnet Terminal

Telnet session can be established between the MA5100 and the maintenance terminal
through two methods: outband or inband, as described below.
1.2.1 Connecting Outband Maintenance Terminal

An outband maintenance terminal is connected to the maintenance Ethernet port (ETH)
on the MMX of the MA5100 over a Telnet session across the IP network. The outband
maintenance mode does not occupy the system resource of the MA5100.
The connection between an outband maintenance terminal and the MA5100 may be
over either a LAN or a WAN.
1-7

I. Connection in a LAN
Figure 1-8 shows the connection between the network interface of the maintenance
terminal and the ETH port of the MA5100 in a LAN.
MMX
CON
MON
ETH
Workstation
MA5100
CLK IN0
CLK IN1
LAN
Server
PC running Telnet
program
Workstation
Figure 1-8 Connection for maintenance through Telnet session in a LAN
Note:
z
The default address of the ETH port on the MA5100 is 10.11.104.2, and mask is 255.255.0.0.
When you log in to the MA5100 through a Telnet session in a LAN, the address of the ETH port must
be in the same network segment as that of the maintenance terminal.
II. Connection in a WAN

In case the maintenance terminal is far away from the MA5100, the Telnet session must
be made through a WAN, as shown in Figure 1-9.
1-8

Local LAN
MA5100
Local router
CON
MON
WAN
ETH
CLK IN0
CLK IN1
Remote router
Local PC running
Telnet program
Remote LAN
Figure 1-9 Connection for maintenance through Telnet session in a WAN
1.2.2 Connecting Inband Maintenance Terminal

An inband maintenance terminal is connected to the maintenance Ethernet port (ETH)
on the MMX of the MA5100 over a Telnet session, in which the MA5100 system
resource is occupied for the transmission of management information.
Figure 1-10 shows the connection for maintenance of the MA5100 in an inband Telnet
session.
MA5100
ATM
LAN
155M optical fiber
IPoA Client
PVC
PC running Telnet
Figure 1-10 Connection for maintenance through inband Telnet session
1.2.3 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

After the inband or outband connection has been made, you can configure the terminal.
1-9

1)
Click [Start/Run] on the PC to execute the Telnet application, as shown in Figure

1-11.
Figure 1-11 Interface for telnet operation

2)
In the Telnet session window, select [Terminal/Preferences] to set the terminal

preferences as shown in Figure 1-12:
Figure 1-12 Setting Telnet terminal preferences

3)
In the Telnet window, select [Connect/Remote System] and input the IP address of
the MA5100 to establish Telnet session with the MA5100, as shown in Figure
1-13.
1-10

Figure 1-13 Connect to the MA5100

4)
Click <Connect> and you will see the following prompt:

Huawei MA5100 Multi-service Access Module.
Copyright(C) 1998-2002 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
> User name (<20 chars):
The default user name is root, and password is admin.
1-11

Chapter 2 Basic Operations of Command Line

The MA5100 provides a complete command line system for you to configure, manage
and maintain the device.
2.1 Overview of Command Line

The MA5100 and MA5103 provide different access capacities, but the system software
is the same. When the device is started up, the system software is able to identify the
device type, and give the command line prompt MA5100> or MA5103>" accordingly.
The MA5100 and MA5103 support different numbers of service boards, and the slots
that accommodate the boards are also different, as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Differences between MA5100 and MA5103
Item
MA5100
MA5103
System prompt
MA5100>
MA5103>
Slot(s) for the MMX board(s)
Slots 7 and 8
Slot 7
Slots of the service boards
Slots 0-6, 9-15
Slots 1-6
This manual takes the MA5100 as an example to introduce how to configure, manage
and maintain the MA5100 serial devices.
2.2 Basic Operations of MA5100 Command Line

Table 2-2 lists the basic operation commands of the MA5100 command line.
Table 2-2 Basic operations of the MA5100 command line
Operation
Command
Mode
Opening/closing the terminal timeout switch
(no) exec-timeout
User EXEC mode
Configuring terminal timeout
terminal timeout
User EXEC mode
Clearing the screen display
cls
User EXEC mode
Displaying system help
help
User EXEC mode
Changing the terminal language
terminal language
User EXEC mode
Exiting the current mode
exit
User EXEC mode
2-1

Operation
Command
Mode
Enabling/disabling automatic scroll of screen output
(no)scroll
User EXEC mode
Enabling/disabling interactive function
(no)smart
User EXEC mode
Displaying history command
show history
User EXEC mode
2.2.1 Command Modes

The MA5100 provides multiple command modes for hierarchical protection of the
command line system against unauthorized access, as shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Command modes of the MA5100 command line system
Mode
Function
Prompt
User EXEC
Querying the boards and

CLI configuration
Access
Exit
MA5100>
First mode after

the connection
has
been
established
exit
Privileged
Querying board status

and
statistics
information
MA5100#
enable in User
EXEC
disable to return
to User EXEC,
exit
to
disconnect
Global
configuration
Configuring global data

and
parameters,
managing the users
MA5100
(config)#
configure
terminal
privileged
exit to return to
privileged
Interface
configuration
Configuring
parameters
properties for
interface
the
and
board
MA5100(config-if
-board
frame/slot)#
interface
global config
in
exit to return to
global config
OAM
configuration
Configuring
function
OAM
MA5100(config-if
-oam-frame/slot/
port)#
Interface oam in
global config
exit to return to
global config
Broadband
test
Configuring
and
implementing
broadband test function
MA5100(config-t
est)#
test in global
config
exit to return to
global config
Environment
monitoring
Configuring environment
monitoring function
MA5100(config-if
-emu-emuid)
interface emu in
the global config
exit to return to
global config
in
Figure 2-1 shows how to change between the different command modes.
2-2

Login
OAM configuration
MA5100
disable
Broadband test
MA5100(config-if-oam-
User EXEC
MA5100(config-test)#
fram/slot/port)#
enable
Interface oam
exit
exit
Configure terminal
Privileged
Interface emu
Global configuration
MA5100 #
test
MA5100(config)#
exit
exit
end
exit
Environment monitor
MA5100(config-ifemu-emuid )#
Interface board frame/slot
Board configuration
MA5100(config-if-board frame/slot )#
Figure 2-1 Change between different command modes

In the global configuration mode, the command interface board/frame/slot is used to
enter different board configuration modes, where:
z
board: refers to the board type
frame/slot: refers to the frame/slot number of the board.
2.2.2 Changing the Terminal Language

The prompt and help information in the MA5100 command line can be displayed in
different languages.Table 2-4 shows the command for changing the language.
Table 2-4 Changing terminal language
Operation
Command
Changing the terminal language
terminal language
MA5100#terminal language
The current language has been switched to general language
2.2.3 Clearing the Screen Display

You can clear the terminal screen so that the expected information can be displayed
explicitly. After you execute the command, the display on the current screen will be
cleared, and the command prompt will be moved to the top left corner of the screen.
Table 2-5 lists the command.
2-3

Table 2-5 Clearing the terminal screen

Operation
Command
Clearing the display on the terminal screen
cls
2.2.4 Configuring Terminal Timeout

You can disconnect the terminal if no operation is made in a specific time period after
login, in order to protect the MA5100 against unauthorized access.
z
When the timeout switch is opened, the default timeout time is five minutes;
When the timeout switch is shut down, the default timeout time is 120 minutes;
The timeout switch must be enabled first before the command can be used for the
configuration.
Table 2-6 Configuring terminal timeout

Operation
Command
Opening the timeout control switch
exec-timeout
Closing the timeout control switch
no exec-timeout
Configuring the timeout time
terminal timeout
2.2.5 Displaying History Command

You can display the commands that you have executed. The displayed history
commands are available only to current login user. Once you log off, the history
commands will be cleared. A maximum of ten history commands can be displayed.
Table 2-7 shows the command.
Table 2-7 Displaying history command
Operation
Command
Displaying history command
show history
2.2.6 Displaying Online Help Information

The MA5100 command line system provides powerful online help functions:
z
In any command mode, you can obtain simple description about the help system
by executing the command help;
2-4

In any command mode, you can obtain the current mode and all the commands
available in such mode by inputting ? after the command line prompt;

After an incomplete command word, you can input ? to obtain help information
about available command words;

After a complete command word, you can input ? to obtain information about the
usage of the command word, as well as related parameters for the command.
For example:
MA5100>help
At any position of the command, type in '?' to get help
If no help is available, it may show nothing
Two types of help are provided:
1. Input a command parameter, you can get a complete help, for example:
'show ?'
The parameters will be described in help
2. If you want to know what it is in the input memory system, you can get
help like the following example:
'show l?'.
2.2.7 Configuring the Help Mode

The MA5100 command line system allows you to set the mode to use the online help.
That is to say, you can select to re-display the previous line of command after you have
obtained the online help information.
The command help-mode is used to enable the help mode. After you execute the
command, and input a command followed with a question mark ?, the system shall
first display the help information about this command, and then display the
command to wait for your further operation.
For example:
MA5100>help-mode
Enable input memory function
MA5100>cls ?
--------------------------------------------User mode command
--------------------------------------------<cr>
Please press <Enter> to execute this command
MA5100>cls
z
The command no help-mode is used to disable the help mode. After you execute
the command and input a command followed with a question mark ?, the system
shall only display the help information about that command.
For example:
MA5100>no help-mode
2-5

Disable input memory function
MA5100>cls ?
--------------------------------------------Command Of User Mode:
--------------------------------------------<cr>
Please press ENTER to execute command
MA5100>
2.2.8 Configuring Interactive Input of Commands

The MA5100 provides interactive input of commands to help you input correct
command and parameters.
z
In the interactive input mode, the system shall judge whether the command and
parameter you input are complete after you press <Enter>. If your input is
incomplete, the system shall prompt you about the corresponding command or
parameter.
If the interactive mode is disabled, the system shall judge the parameters and
execute the command directly after you press <Enter>. In this case, if the input is
incomplete, the system shall give an error prompt.
You can choose to enable or disable the interactive input function, and Table 2-8 lists
the commands.
Table 2-8 Enabling or disabling the interactive input
Operation
Command
Enabling the interactive input of command
smart
Disabling the interactive input of command
no smart
2.2.9 Scrolling the Terminal Display

Sometimes, the terminal screen cannot contain all the displayed information, and you
can scroll the screen for the display, so that you can view the information more
effectively.
If you expect to query the information screen by screen, enable this function first, and
then scroll the screen manually. If you disable this function, the screen will be scrolled
automatically. Table 2-9 lists the commands.
2-6

Table 2-9 Enabling or disabling the scroll of screen display

Operation
Command
Enabling auto scroll of screen display
scroll
Disabling auto scroll of screen display
no scroll
When you choose to scroll the screen by hand, you can press <Ctrl+C> to terminate the
display, or press any other key to display the information screen by screen.
2-7

Chapter 3 User Management

There are two types of users concerning the MA5100 in this manual:
z
Operating user: Person who possesses a certain authority to log in to the MA5100
for configuration and maintenance.
Access user: The subscriber who accesses the Internet through the MA5100.
This chapter introduces the management on the operating users, while the
management on access users is described in the part Service Applications.
3.1 Overview
The operating users on the MA5100 are classified into three levels according to their
authorities: Common User, Operator and Administrator.
z
Common User: The user who is only allowed to make query and execute the most
fundamental commands such as changing password.
Operator: The user who is allowed to perform general configuration and

maintenance to the MA5100.
Administrator: The user who has the highest level of authority to execute all
commands, including management on the lower level users.
The MA5100 implements hierarchical user management through user accounts and
corresponding operation authorities that are configured for the user account. When a
user logs in to the MA5100, the user name and password will be matched to verify the
user authenticity. If it is a legal user, the corresponding authority will be assigned to the
user for operation.
3.2 Managing the Users

The administrator can add/delete a user, and set the attributes of the user, including:
user name, authority, password and permitted reenter times. Table 3-1 lists the
commands for user management
Table 3-1 User management commands
Operation
Command
Mode
Adding or deleting a user
(no) terminal user name
Privileged mode
Configuring user authority
terminal user level
Privileged mode
Configuring user password
terminal user password
Privileged mode
Modifying additional information
terminal user apdinfo
Privileged mode
3-1

Operation
Command
Mode
Configuring user reenter number
terminal user reenter
Privileged mode
Disconnecting a Telnet user
telnet delete
Privileged mode
Showing User Information
show terminal user
User EXEC mode
show client
User EXEC mode
Showing the
information
online
user
3.2.1 Adding a User

I. Determining the user authority
Before adding a user, first determine the authority of the user to be added according to
actual needs in the maintenance and operation. Think carefully before you add an
administrator.
II. Adding a user and displaying the user information

There is a default administor root with initial password admin. After you have logged in
to the MA5100 by using this user name and password, you can use the command
terminal user name to add new operating users.
When adding a user, you need to specify the user name, password, user level,
permitted reenter times and append information, which are explained as follows:
z
Username: A string of 1~15 printable characters which are case-insensitive. User

names cannot repeat with each other, and no space is allowed in a username.
Password: A string of 1~15 case sensitive characters. Common users can only
modify their own passwords, and the Administrator can modify passwords of other
users.
Permitted reenter times: Whether you can log in to the MA5100 simultaneously
from multiple terminals depends on the reenter times. They range from 1 to 4. 0
means that you cannot log in to the MA5100. This parameter is recommended to
be 1.
Authority: There are three authority levels, namely, Common User, Operator and
Administrator.
Append information: When necessary, additional information about the user, such
as the telephone number and address of the user can be added in this part. The
append information cannot exceed 30 characters.
3-2

Note:
z
Only the Administrator can add a new user.
You can change the password of the user root.
Multiple users can be added at one time, and the system allows a maximum of 126 users.
The following example shows how to add a common user huawei, the number of
reenter times of the user is 2, and append information is the telephone number
0755-8008302118.
MA5100#terminal user name
User name (<=15 chars):huawei
User password(<=15 chars):
Confirm Password(<=15 chars):
User's Level(1--3)
1. Common User
2. Operator
3. Administrator:1
Permitted reenter number(0--4):2

User append information(<=30 chars):0755-8008302118
This user has been added
Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n
//choose y to add users continuously.
The system gives prompt to enter another username.
After the user has been added, you can display the user information. For example:
MA5100#show terminal user
{ username<S><1,15>|all <k>|online <k> }:huawei
---------------------------------------------------------------Name
Level
Status
ReenterNum
AppendInfo
-----------------------------------------------------------Huawei
User
Offline
0755-8008302118
----------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.2 Deleting a User

An Administrator can use the command no terminal user name to delete lower-level
users.
3-3

Note:
z
You cannot delete the user root.
A user who is logging in cannot be deleted, but a Telnet user who is logging in can be disconnected by
a higher-level user by executing the command telnet delete.
Multiple users can be deleted at one time.
The following example shows how to delete the user huawei:

MA5100#no terminal user name
Are you sure to delete the user?(y/n) [n]:y
This user has been deleted
Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:
3.2.3 Modifying User Attributes

The user attributes that can be modified include the user level, password, number of
reenter times and append information.
I. Modifying user level

An Administrator can modify the levels of other users by using the command terminal
user level.
The following example shows how to change a Common user to an Operator.
MA5100#terminal user level
1. Common User
2. Operator
3. Administrator:
User's Level(1--3)2
Information will take effect when this user logs on next time
II. Modifying user password

The command terminal user password is used to modity user password.
Administrators can modify the passwords of all users (including themselves), while
Common users and Operators can only modify their own passwords.
MA5100#terminal user password
New password(<=15 chars):
Information will take effect when this user logs on next time
3-4

III. Modifying permitted reenter times

The command terminal user reenter is used to modify the permitted reenter times.
Only the Administrators can perform this operation.
MA5100#terminal user reenter
Permitted reenter number(0--4):1
Information takes effect
IV. Modifying append information

The command terminal user apdinfo is used to modify the append information of a
user. Administrators can modify the append information of all users. Common users
and Operators can only modify their own append information.
MA5100#terminal user apdinfo
User append information(<=30 chars):support@huawei.com
3.2.4 Displaying User Information

I. Displaying the information of all users
The command show terminal user is used to display the username, level, status,
permitted reenter times and append information of a specific user or all users.
MA5100#show terminal user
{ username<S><1,15>|all <k>|online <k> }:all
---------------------------------------------------------------Name
Level
Status
ReenterNum
AppendInfo
-----------------------------------------------------------Root
Admin
Online
Huawei
Operator
Offline
0755-8008302118
----------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
Only the information of users with the same levels as or lower levels than the level of the current login user
can be displayed by using the show terminal user command.
3-5

II. Displaying the information of online users

The command show client is used to display the information of online users who have
the same levels as or lower levels than the level of the current login user. The
information includes the client ID, client name, client type (serial port login or Telnet
login) and login IP address.
MA5100#show client
-------------------------------------------------------Client ID
Client Name
Client Type
IP Address
-------------------------------------------------------2
root
Telnet
10.11.106.133
huawei
Telnet
10.11.105.73
--------------------------------------------------------
3.2.5 Controlling the Login of a Telnet User

An Administrator can disconnect a lower-level Telnet user by using the command
telnet delete. The client ID of the user to be disconnected has to be entered, which can
be queried by executing the command show client.
MA5100#telnet delete
{ ClientID<1,5> }:3
3-6

Chapter 4 System Management

System management includes these aspects: basic operations, displaying basic
information, and system control. Table 4-1 lists the major system management
commands.
Table 4-1 Major commands for the MA5100 system management
Operation
Command
Mode
Setting system time
time
Privileged mode
Displaying system time
show time
User EXEC mode
Displaying system version information
show version
User EXEC mode
Displaying occupation rate of system memory
system mem
User EXEC mode
Displaying CPU occupation rate of a specific board
show cpu
User EXEC mode
Displaying system MAC address
show mac-address
User EXEC mode
Displaying log
show log
User EXEC mode
Configuring serial port baud rate
baudrate
Privileged mode
Resetting the system
reboot
Privileged mode
Saving the configuration
save
Privileged mode
Erasing the configuration from Flash Memory
erase flash
Privileged mode
Holding/un-holding user terminal
(no)terminal hold
Privileged mode
Testing the network connectivity
ping
User EXEC mode
Tracing the routes to the destination
tracert
User EXEC mode
4.1 Basic Operations

4.1.1 Setting and Displaying System Time
Table 4-2 lists the commands to set and display the time of the MA5100 system.
Table 4-2 Setting and displaying systme time
Operation
Command
Setting system time
time
4-1

Operation
Command
Displaying system time
show time
When you use the command time to change the current time of the MA5100 system,
the time must be input according to the format given in the command. For example:
MA5100#time
{ time<T><hh:mm:ss>|date<D><yyyy-mm-dd> }:10:06:07
{ <cr>|date<D><yyyy-mm-dd> }:2003-07-05
MA5100#show time
Date:
2003-07-05
Time:
10:07:46
4.1.2 Displaying System Version

The command show version is used to display the system version and the board
version.
Note:
z
The default display is the system version, including the software version and compiling date, the
hardware version and compiling date and the company name.
If you input the frame number, version information of all the boards in the frame will be displayed.
If you input the frame number and slot number, version information of the specific board will be
displayed.
MA5100>show version
MA5100V200R002 RELEASE SOFTWARE
Copyright (c) 1998-2003 by HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD.
BIOS Version is 500

MA5100 with 1 MPC8xx (Rev 00.00) CPU running at 50Mhz
0
M bytes SDRAM
32 M bytes Flash Memory

256K bytes SRAM
MA5100 uptime is 2 day(s), 15 hour(s), 43 minute(s), 50 second(s)
4-2

4.1.3 Displaying the Occupation Rate of System Memory

The command system mem is used to display the occupation rate of system memory.
For example:
MA5100>system mem
System memory occupancy: 41%
4.1.4 Displaying CPU Occupation Rate

The command show cpu is used to display the CPU occupation rate of a specific board.
For example:
MA5100>show cpu 0/7
CPU occupancy: 12%
4.1.5 Displaying System MAC Address

The command show mac-address is used to display the system MAC address. The
first three bytes in a MAC address identify the manufacturer, and the identifier for
Huawei in the MAC address is 00-e0-fc.
MA5100#show mac-address
MAC address of active mainboard: 00-e0-fc-22-33-44
4.1.6 Displaying Log

The command show log is used to display the records of operations made by current
user. The log contains the username, the operation time, IP address, login mode and
operation name.
An Administrator can query the log information of other users through usernames.
Note:
z
The MA5100 stores a maximum of 512 log records. Once this is exceeded, the oldest record will be
overwritten.
While querying the log, you can use the command (no) scroll to set whether to scroll the screen
display automatically.
MA5100>show log
{ index<K>|username<S><1,15>|all<K> }:index
{ index1<1,512> }:1
{ <cr>|index2<1,512> }:2
4-3

-------------------------------------------------------------------No.
UserName
Date&Time
LogMode
IP-Address
root
2003-07-04 10:26:59
Serial
--
Cmd:
configure terminal
-------------------------------------------------------------------No.
UserName
Date&Time
LogMode
IP-Address
root
2003-07-04 10:26:39
Serial
--
Cmd:
terminal timeout 40
--------------------------------------------------------------------
4.1.7 Configuring Serial Port Baudrate

The command baudrate is used to set the baudrate of a serial port. This command is
invalid to Telnet users. For example:
MA5100#baudrate
{ baudrate-value<E><9600,19200,38400,57600,115200> }:9600
The baudrate must be set on active serial
4.2 System Management

4.2.1 Resetting the System
The command reboot is used to reset the MA5100 system, the active MMXC board or
the standby MMXC board.
MA5100#reboot
{ Options<E><system, active, standby> }:system
Data is not saved, the unsaved data will lose if reboot system, are you sure
to reboot system? (y/n)[n]:y
z
If you select system, the MA5100 will restart and all the services on the device will
be interrupted.
If you select active, the active MMXC board will restart. When the standby MMXC
board works normal, resetting the active MMXC will switch over between the
active and standby MMXC boards.
If you select standby, the standby MMXC board will restart.
Caution:
If you reset the active MMXC board while the standby MMXC board is faulty or not in position, the MA5100
system will be reset.
4-4

4.2.2 Saving the Configuration

The command save is used to save the configuration to the Flash Memory on the
MMXC board.
4.2.3 Erasing the Configuration from Flash Memory

The command erase flash is used to delete the configuration from the Flash Memory
on the MMXC board.
4.2.4 Holding a User Terminal

The command terminal hold is used to lock a terminal of current user or that of a
lower-level user. When locking a terminal, you need to input and confirm the password.
After the terminal is locked, the correct password must be presented to unlock the
terminal.
A higher-level user can unlock a locked terminal by using the command no terminal
hold.
The following example shows how to lock the terminal of a current user.
MA5100#terminal hold
{ <cr>|ClientID<1,5> }:
Hold Password(<=15 chars):
The user terminal has been held
Hold Password(<=15 chars):
MA5100#
The following example shows how to lock the terminal of a lower-level user by the
Administrator system, in which the clientid of the lower-level user is 5.
MA5100#terminal hold 5
Hold Password(<-15bytes):
Confirm Password(<-15bytes):
The user terminal has been held
MA5100#no terminal hold 5
Hold Password(<=15bytes):
MA5100#
4.2.5 Testing Network Connectivity

Commands are available to check network connectivity and host reachability, as well as
the gateways through which the testing data packets have passed from the sending
4-5

host to the destination. These commands help you to pinpoint the network faults, and to
log in to the remote host. There are two commands for this purpose: ping and tracert.
I. ping
The command ping is used to check the network connectivity and whether a host is
reachable. For example:
MA5100#ping 10.11.106.133
PING 10.11.106.133: 56
data bytes, press CTRL_C to break
Reply from 10.11.106.133: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=125 time = 6 ms

--- 10.11.106.133 Ping statistics --5 packets transmitted

5 packets received
0.00% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 6/6/6 ms
II. tracert
The command tracert is used to find out which gateways the testing packets have
passed through on their way from the sending host to the destination. This command
helps to check the network connectivity and locate the network fault. For example:
MA5100#tracert 10.11.106.133
traceroute to 10.11.106.133 max hops 30 ,packet 40 bytes
press CTRL_C to break
1
253 ms
476 ms
508 ms
10.11.120.62
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
4 ms
4 ms
5 ms
10.11.106.133
4-6

Chapter 5 Board Configuration

The boards on the MA5100 can be classified into three types: the main control board on
the master frame, the main control board on slave frames and the service boards.
5.1 Overview
The main control board on the master frame is MMXC, the main control board on the
slave frames is SMXB, and the service boards include the ADSL, SHDSL, LAN, CES,
FR, AIU, SLC, SLF, SPL and SEP.
When the MA5100 is configured with slave frames, the master frame number is 0, and
the slave frames are numbered from 1 to 4.
z
Configuration of boards on the master frame
The MMXC is always inserted in slots 7 and 8 of the master frame, and the service
boards are inserted in the rest slots (slots 0-6 and slots 9-15).
z
Configuration of boards on the slave frame(s)
The SMXB is always inserted in slots 7 and 8 of the slave frame, and the ADSL service
board is inserted in the rest slots (slots 0-6 and slots 9-15).
Basic operations in board management include adding, deleting, prohibiting,
unprohibiting and resetting a board, as well as related queries. Table 5-1 lists the
commands.
Table 5-1 Commands for board management
Operation
Command
Mode
Adding a board
board add
Global configuration mode
Deleting a board
board delete
Global configuration mode, for service boards
Confirming a board
Board confirm
Global configuration mode, for service boards
(no)board
prohibit
Resetting a board
board reset
User EXEC mode, Global configuration mode
Displaying board information
show board
Prohibiting/unprohibiting
board
Table 5-2 shows the various status of a board when it is running.
5-1

Table 5-2 Board status

Status
Description
Comm Fail
Indicates faulty physical link of a service board.
Comm OK
Indicates normal physical link of a service board.
Normal
Indicates a service board is registered successfully, and works normally.
Fail
Indicates a service board is faulty.
Active-Normal
MMXC and SEP are normal
Standby-Norma
l
MMX and SEP are normal
Prohibit
Indicates a service board is in prohibited status.
Configuring
Indicates a service is in configuration status.
Auto_find
Indicates a service board has been inserted into the slot but not yet confirmed.
5.2 Operation Procedures

5.2.1 Adding a Board
For an empty slot, you can configure the data offline, which means you can use the
command board add to add a board to an empty slot, and then configure the data in
corresponding board configuration mode. After the operation, if you insert the board
into the slot, the configuration will take effect immediately. The procedures are as
follows:
I. Identifying an empty slot

You can only add a service board to an empty slot. The command show board is used
to display the boards to help you make sure which slots are empty.
II. Adding the board

The command board add is used to add a board. Note that service boards can only be
added in slots 0-6 and slots 9-15. For example:
MA5100(config)#board add 0/4 H511adle
Frame 0 slot 4 board add successfully
When the board is added successfully, there will be a prompt showing that
communication between the board and the MMXC fails. For example:
MA5100(config)#
! 1[2002-11-20 08:34:39]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
5-2

ALARM 36967 FAULT MAJOR 0x02310000 EQUIPMENT 2002-11-20 08:34:39

ALARM NAME : Board fail
PARAS INFO : FrameID: 0, SlotID: 4, Name: H511ADLE
DESCRIPTION : Board fail
REASON : Communication with the main control board gets abnormal
ADVICE : Check whether the board and the backplane of the frame are
connected properly. Communication failure caused by command of resetting board
can be left unsolved
--- END
Note:
z
Except SPL, other service boards will all be identified and registered automatically.
SPL cannot register automatically, and must be added through the command board add.
SPL and ADSL boards are used in pairs.
III. Displaying the added board

The command show board is used to display the board you have added. The board
status will be fail, because you have not inserted the board into the slot.
5.2.2 Confirming a Board

The MA5100 is able to identify a board and its subboard automatically. The command
board confirm is used to confirm a specific board or all the boards in a frame.
The added boards must be confirmed before further configuration can be made.
The following example shows how to confirm all the boards in frame 0:
MA5100(config)#board confirm 0
0 Frame 0 slot board confirm successfully
5.2.3 Deleting a Board

A board that is no longer used can be deleted. The operation procedures are as follows.
5-3

I. Confirming the board status

Check whether there is connection on the ports of the board, whether services are
running on the board, whether the board has a clock source, and whether the board the
inter-frame board.
The command show board is used to check the state of the board to be deleted.
Note:
z
SPL can be deleted in any status.
Other service boards can only be deleted in Fail or Prohibit status, or before any connection has been
established.
MMXC can not be deleted.
A service board must be deleted if another type of board shall be used in the same slot.
II. Deleting the board

The command board delete is used to delete a board together with all its related
configuration data. This operation can not be recovered.
Note:
To delete a board that is in normal status, you can prohibit it first, so as to avoid mistakes.
MA5100(config)#board delete
{ frameid/slotid<S><3,5> }:0/4
Board delete succeed
You can not delete the MMXC, or a board that has service running on it. For example:
MA5100(config)#board delete
Fail to delete board
MA5100(config)#board delete 0/13

are you sure to delete this board? (y/n)[n]:y
Board delete fail, cause: service connect
5-4

III. Confirming the operation

After the board is deleted successfully, if you use the command show board to check
the result, you will see that the slot becomes empty.
5.2.4 Prohibiting/Unprohibiting a Board

The command board prohibit is used to prohibit a board. This operation prohibits
normal service of the board. Except for the commands to unprohibit or delete the board,
any other operations will be denied on a prohibited board.
By prohibiting a board, you can:
z
Clear the alarms;
Terminate the service without deleting the service;
Delete a board;
Release the system resources dynamically.
MMXC and unconfirmed boards cannot be prohibited.

The specific procedures are given below.
I. Confirming the board status

The command show board is used to display the status of the board to be prohibited.
The prohibit command is only valid on an unprohibited board, while the unprohibit
command is only valid on a prohibited board.
II. Prohibiting/unprohibiting the board

The command board prohibit is used to prohibit a board.
MA5100(config)#board prohibit
Prohibit board will interrupt all services on this board, are you sure to
prohibit board?(y/n)[n]:y
Board prohibit successfully
To unprohibit a board, use the command no board prohibit.
III. Confirming the operation

After the board is prohibited successfully, if you use the command show board to
check the result, you will see that the board status becomes Prohibit, and the status of
an unprohibited board becomes Normal. For example:
MA5100(config)#show board 0
--------------------------------------------------
5-5

SlotID
BoardName
Status
SubType1
H511AIU
Normal
O2CTG
H511ADLD
Prohibit
H511MMXC
active _Normal
H511MMXC
Standby_ Normal
H511FRCA
Normal
H511LAND
Normal
SubType2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
E1_FR
11
12
13
14
15
--------------------------------------------------
5.2.5 Resetting a Board

The command board reset is used to reset all the MA5100 service boards except
MMXC and SPL.
MA5100(config)#board reset 0/1
Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y
0 frame 1 slot reset board message sent successfully...
5.2.6 Configuring Port Type

The MMXC, AIU and LAND boards of the MA5100 provide various types of upstream
ports through different subboards. Table 5-3 lists the types of subboards used.
Table 5-3 Subboards of the MA5100
Subboard
Interface
Main board
O1CTG
It provides one 155M optical port (single mode), supporting

STM-1 and OC-3c.
MMX and AIUA
O1CTB
It provides one 155M optical port (multi-mode), supporting

STM-1 and OC-3c.
MMX and AIUA
O2CTG
It provides two 155M optical ports (single mode), supporting

STM-1 and OC-3c.
MMX and AIUA
O2CTB
It provides two 155M optical ports (multi-mode), supporting

STM-1 and OC-3c.
MMX and AIUA
5-6

Subboard
Interface
Main board
E1CT
It provides one 155M electric port, supporting STM-1 and

STS-3c.
MMX and AIUA
E2CT
It provides two 155M electric ports, supporting STM-1 and

STS-3c.
MMX and AIUA
E8IT
It provides eight E1 interfaces, supporting four IMA groups.
MMX and AIUA
E13T
It provides one E3 interface.
MMX and AIUA
E23T
It provides two E3 interfaces.
MMX and AIUA
O1GTA
It provides one 1000BASE-SX optical port (multi-mode).
LAND
O1GTF
It provides one 1000BASE-LX optical port (single mode).
LAND
O1GTH
It provides one 1000BASE-LX optical port (single mode)
LAND
E8FS
It provides eight 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports.
LAND
O1FSB
It provides one 1000BASE-FX port (multi-mode).
LAND
O1FSF
It provides one 1000BASE-FX port (single mode).
LAND
O1FSG
It provides one 1000BASE-FX port (single mode).
LAND
02FSB
It provides two 1000BASE-FX ports (multi-mode).
LAND
02FSF
It provides two 1000BASE-FX ports (single mode).
LAND
02FSG
It provides two 1000BASE-FX ports (single mode).
LAND
O4FSB
It provides four 100BASE-FX ports (multi-mode).
LAND
O4FSF
It provides four 100BASE-FX ports (multi-mode).
LAND
O4FSG
It provides four 100BASE-FX ports (single mode).
LAND
O8FSB
It provides eight 100BASE-FX ports (multi-mode).
LAND
O8FSF
It provides eight 100BASE-FX ports (single mode).
LAND
When the MMXC, AIUA and LAND are inserted into the frame, the MA5100 is able to
automatically identify the subboard type. However, when you add these boards offline
(when the board is not inserted), it is necessary to specify the subboard type.
When the MMXC and AIUA are attached with the 155M optical/electric subboards, they
can provide STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces and STM-1/STS-3c electrical ports
through the software configuration. The default type is STM-1 optical and electric
interfaces.
The following example shows how to configure the MMXC optical port 8 as STM-1.
MA5100(config-if-mmx-0/7)#port mode
{ port<8,11> }:8
{ mode<E><OC-3c/STS-3c,STM-1> }:stm-1
5-7

Configure port mode successfully
Note:
z
Use the command sub-interface to enter the optic or electric configuration mode before you
configure the port type.
The configuration procedures for the MMXC and AIU port types are the same.
5-8

Chapter 6 Clock Configuration

6.1 Introduction to Clock Synchronization
Clock synchronization keeps the clock frequency and phase of various network nodes
within a preset tolerance range, which helps to avoid transmission deterioration (such
as bit error and jitter) of digital transmission system caused by incorrect transmission
and receiving alignment.
There are two ways to provide clock synchronization in a digital network: pseudo
synchronization and master/slave synchronization.
z
Pseudo synchronization
Under the pseudo synchronization mode, the clocks of various digital exchanges are
independent. The digital exchanges use clocks of high precision and stability like
cesium clock. Although clocks of different digital exchanges are not exactly the same in
frequency and phase, the error is so tiny that it can be regarded as synchronous.
Therefore it is called pseudo synchronization. Pseudo synchronization is mainly
applicable to international digital network.
z
Master/slave synchronization
Under the master-slave synchronization mode, there is an exchange office that

provides the high-precision clocks. Other offices shall trace the clock in the master
office, and control the clock of their subordinate offices.
6.2 Clock Synchronization of the MA5100

The MA5100 uses the master-slave synchronization mode.
There are three types of clocks on the MA5100: board synchronization clock, system
synchronization clock and interface clock.
z
Board clock
This is the clock that guarantees the synchronization among different modules in the
same board.
z
System clock
This is the 19.44 MHz and 32.768 MHz clock provided by the MMXC through the
backplane. The 19.44 MHz clock serves as the SDH reference clock, so it is called SDH
clock. The 32.768 MHz clock serves as TDM bus reference clock, so it is called TDM
clock.
6-1

Note:
z
AIU, MMXC and CES boards need SDH clock;
CES and FR boards need TDM clock;
LAN and ADSL boards do not need any system clock.
Interface clock
This is the clock transmitted between the MA5100 and other devices that connect with
the MA5100, which aims to guarantee the synchronization of the data communication
network between the devices. The MA5100 obtains the clock from superior network
elements, or sends the clock signal to the inferior network elements.
Table 6-1 lists the commands.
Table 6-1 Clock management commands
Operation
Command
Mode
Setting clock source priority
clock priority
Enabling or disabling a clock source
(no)clock source
Displaying clock source information
show clock source
Privileged mode
Displaying clock mode
show clock mode
Privileged mode
Displaying clock subboard port

status
show clock status
Privileged mode
Displaying clock status
show clock state
Privileged mode
6.3 Configuring the Clock

The configuration of clock includes the following procedures:
z
Setting the clock source
Setting the clock source priority
Displaying the clock subboard port
Displaying CKMB work mode
Displaying clock source state
The following gives detailed instruction for the configuration of clock.
6-2

6.3.1 Setting a Clock Source

I. Setting the clock source
The command clock source is used to:
z
Assign the input clock of a specific port as the input clock source for the clock
subboard CKMB. The ports that can provide clock source include the ATM port
(155M ATM, IMA, and E3), and the CES E1 port.
Assign the clock recovered in the PVC to the CES UDT port as the input clock
source for the CKMB. In this case, the clock sent from CES UDT port must be
Synchronous Residual Time Stamp (SRTS).
The MA5100 can have up to 10 clock sources that can either be set as TDM or SDH
clocks. The phase-locked clock unit judges the clock source types and transmits by
priority these clock sources to the CKMB for lock-in.
The following example shows how to provide a reference source from port 0, slot 15 of
frame 0:
MA5100(config)#clock source
{ srcindex<0,9> }:0
{frameid/slotid/portid<S><1,18> }:0/15/0
{ <cr>|ces_clktype<E><line_clk,srts_clk> }:
II. Boards that can be set as clock source

At present, MMXC, AIU and CES boards can be set as clock sources.
z
The MMXC and AIU can provide multiple types of clock source interfaces. When
the boards use dual-interface subboards, only one clock source interface can be
configured.
The E1 interface on the CES can be configured as clock source interface. In the
configuration, the type of CES clock source must be line_clk or srts_clk. line_clk
means the line Rx clock is selected as the clock source, while srts_clk means the
cell restored clock is selected as the clock source. If you select srts_clk, the clock
mode must be set as srts. SRTS is only valid on CES UDT port.
III. Clearing the clock source

The command no clock source is used to clear a reference source of the TDM clock
and the SDH clock.
Clearing the clock source may cause switchover between clock sources.
The following example shows how to clear the clock source 1.
MA5100(config)#no clock source
{ sourceid<0,9> }:1
6-3

Clear clock source succeed
IV. Displaying the clock source

The command show clock source is used to display basic information about the clock
source. For example:
MA5100(config)#show clock source
-----------------------------Index
Config
Source
-----------------------------0
YES
AIU
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
NO
-/ -/ -
0 /15/0
6.3.2 Setting Clock Source Priority

Setting of clock source only describes and records the interfaces that provide reference
clock, it does not phase-lock directly any of the clock sources. To realize the phase-lock,
priority of the clock sources must be specified.
When there are multiple reference source clocks, the one with highest priority will be
phase-locked first. If such clock is lost, the one with second highest priority will be
locked, and so on.
The command clock priority is used to set the priority for TDM or SDH clocks.
The following example shows how to set SDH clock source 0 with the highest priority.
MA5100(config)#clock priority
{ sdh<K>|tdm<K> }:sdh
{ p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9<S><1,19> }:0
Clock priority set succeed
In the command, p0-p9 are the priority levels. p0 indicates the highest priority while p9
means the lowest priority.
The following example shows how to set the TDM clock 0 from CKMB as the
highest-priority clock, and the clock of index number 1 as the second highest priority
clock.
6-4

MA5100(config)#clock priority
{ sdh<K>|tdm<K> }:tdm
{ p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9<S><1,19> }:0/1
Clock priority set succeed
Note:
z
A clock source will not take effect until its priority is set.
After the priority has been set, the system will select clock sources from the ports that are normal for
the SDH clock and TDM clock, merely according to their priorities without considering the quality of the
source. So the high-quality clocks are recommended to be set at high priority.
6.3.3 Displaying CKMB Port Status

The CKMB subboard can process four input clocks, including two SDH clocks and two
TDM clocks. The phase-locked clock unit checks in real time whether all clocks have
clock sources. If a clock source is ineffective, it cannot serve as the locked clock source
in locked mode.
The command show clock status is used to check whether there is clock signal output
on the four clock ports on the CKMB subboard. The result 1 means there is clock signal
output on the port, while 0 means there is no output on the port. For example:
MA5100(config)#show clock status
TDMr1
TDMr0
SDHr1
SDHr0
Note:
z
When the CES is set as the clock source, clock signals must be available on ports TDMr0 or TDMr1 on
the CKMB subboard.
When the ATM ports on the MMXC or AIU are set as the clock source, clock signals must be available
on ports SDHr0 and SDHr1 on the CKMB subboard.
6.3.4 Displaying CKMB Work Mode

The command show clock mode is used to display the work mode of current TDM
clock or SDH clock. The work mode can be: free run, fast pull-in, locked and holdover:
z
Free run: There is no locked clock source, and the CKMB provides system clock.
6-5

Fast pull-in: There is clock source and the device is synchronizing with the source.
Locked: The synchronization is completed, and the clock source has been locked.
Holdover: The locked clock source is lost, but the clock will be held for 24 hours. If
any clock source can be locked within this period of time, the locked mode will start.
Otherwise, the free run mode will start.
If the clock mode is fast pull-in or locked, it means that the clock lock-in has succeeded.
The following example shows the mode of the current SDH clock.
MA5100#show clock mode sdh
Trace mode parameter: ID=SDH
clock source=BITSr0
6.3.5 Displaying Clock Source State

The command show clock state is used to display basic information about the output
SDH or TDM clock source. For example:
MA5100(config)#show clock state
{ clktype<E><sdh,tdm> }:sdh
----------------------------------------------------------------Index
Config
Source
Is SDH
State
Priority
Output
---------------------------------------------------------------0
YES
AIU 0/15/0
YES
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
NO
-/ -/ -
---
--
---
---
YES
Normal
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------z
Config: States of the clock sources. Yes means the clock source has been
configured, while No means the clock source is not yet configured.
Source: The origins and positions of the clock sources.
Is SDH: Type of the clock source, which can be SDH or TDM.
State: State of the clock source, which can be normal or faulty.
Priority: The priority levels of the clock sources.
Output: Whether the clock source is being locked.
6.4 Configuring Tx Clock

Tx clock indicates the clock signal sent out to the network from the MA5100.
6-6

On the MA5100, these boards are able to send out Tx clocks to the network: AIU, CES
and FR.
There are two types of Tx clocks on the MA5100: line clock and system clock.
z
Line clock
When line clock is selected for the outgoing port, it means the clock extracted at the
receiving port will loop back to the outgoing port. This selection is applicable when the
MA5100 is locked with the clock of opposite NE.
z
System clock
When system clock is selected for the outgoing port, it means synchronizing the
outgoing signals with the TDM or SDH clock of the MA5100. This selection is applicable
when the opposite NE is locked with the clock of the MA5100.
The command tx clock is used in corresponding board configuration mode for the
configuration.
6-7

Chapter 7 Traffic Management

The MA5100 manages PVC traffic according to service type, so as to provide effective
service for each subscriber.
The MA5100 manages PVC traffic through its traffic table. It provides five default traffic
options (index 0-4). Before establish service PVC, check whether the items in the traffic
table can satisfy the service demand. If so, quote the index value of the traffic table
directly while establishing service PVC. Otherwise, add the required traffic table items.
The index of the traffic table item shall be automatically allocated.
The MA5100 supports four service types and a total of thirteen traffic types that comply
with RFC2514. Table 7-1 lists the parameters for configuration.
Table 7-1 Traffic type and traffic parameters
Service
CBR
rt_VBR
nrt_VBR
UBR
UBR
Traffic type
Para 1
Para 2
Para 3
Para 4
NO_CLP_NO_SCR
CLP01PCR
CLP_NO_TAGGING_NO_SCR
ulCLP0PCR
ulCLP01PC
R
CLP_TAGGING_NO_SCR
ulCLP0PCR
ulCLP01PC
R
NO_CLP_NO_SCR_CDVT
CLP01PCR
CDVT
CLP_TRANSPARENT_NO_SCR
CLP01PCR
CDVT
CLP_TRANSPARENT_SCR
CLP01PCR
CLP01SCR
MBS
CDVT
NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT
CLP01PCR
CLP01SCR
MBS
CDVT
CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR_CDVT
CLP01PCR
CLP0SCR
MBS
CDVT
CLP_TAGGING_SCR_CDVT
CLP01PCR
CLP0SCR
MBS
CDVT
NO_CLP_SCR
CLP01PCR
CLP01SCR
MBS
CLP_NO_TAGGING_SCR
CLP01PCR
CLP0SCR
MBS
CLP_TAGGING_SCR
CLP01PCR
CLP0SCR
MBS
CDVT
No_Traffic_Descript
NO_CLP_NO_SCR
CLP01PCR
NO_CLP_NO_SCR_CDVT
CLP01PCR
CLP01SCR
NO_CLP_TAGGING_NO_SCR
CLP01PCR
CDVT
7-1

Table 7-2 lists the commands for maintaining the traffic tables.
Table 7-2 Traffic management commands
Operation
Command
Mode
Configuring traffic rank for rate table
modify rate table row
Displaying traffic rank for rate table
show rate table row
Displaying all traffic items
show traffic table
Adding or deleting traffic description table
(no)traffic table
7.1 Service Type

The MA5100 supports four service types: CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR. The
following introduces the service characteristics and applications.
I. CBR
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) is applicable to the connection that needs static bandwidth in
life cycle, which requires the highest priority. The most distinctive characteristics of
CBR are its stable service data stream. CBR is typically applicable to line, emulation
voice and video users. To apply for CBR service, the only parameter you need to
provide is a Peak Cell Rate (PCR).
II. rt-VBR
Real-Time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR) is very sensitive to the delay of data stream and
delay variance. It is typically applied to voice and video interactive service. rt-VBR
service allows burst to some degree to allow a variable rate of sending data in different
time. To apply for rt-VBR service, you need to specify the Peak Cell Rate (PCR),
Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR) and Max Burst Length (MBS).
III. nrt-VBR
Non-Real-Time Variable Bit Rate (nrt-VBR) is applicable to the non-real-time service
characterized by burst. Compared with rt-VBR service, nrt-VBR does not require very
high real-time performance of service, and the priority level of its service data at
network end is lower than that of rt-VBR. When you apply for rt-VBR service, you need
to specify the Peak Cell Rate (PCR), Mean Cell Rate (SCR) and Max Burst Length
(MBS).
7-2

IV. UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) is applicable to the service types of less real-time but larger
burst. However, UBR user only requires best-effort service of network side, thus no
parameter of service quality is needed to apply for service. However, the network side
by no means guarantees the service quality for UBR. In case of network congestion,
UBR cell shall be firstly discarded. The correction of its data is completed by the upper
layer protocol. It is typically applicable to FTP and E-mail.
7.2 Traffic Rank

To improve the processing efficiency, the MA5100 provides 16 traffic ranks for CBR
parameter CLP01PCR and rt-VBR parameters CPL01SCR and CLP0SCR. The
parameters in discussion must be one of the 16 ranks.
By default, there are 16 traffic ranks: 64, 128, 192, 256, 512, 1024, 1500, 2048, 2500,
6000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 12000, 20000, 45000 and 100000. To modify an existing
traffic rank, use the command modify rate table row. To view a traffic rank table, use
the command show rate table row.
7.3 Principles for Traffic Control

The following are the basic principles of traffic control:
z
Make traffic control at the access side, and traffic monitor at the convergence side.
Make traffic control where traffic is converged or traffic congestion is likely to

happen.
Make traffic control near the source end.
Make traffic control where a switching node is placed
Make traffic control in every node to ensure end-to-end QoS.
PVC bandwidth is determined by the minimum SCR among PVC node. Therefore,
traffic control can be made at any node in PVC.
For services passing multiple switching nodes, the user bandwidth is determined
by the minimum Sustainable Cell Rate (SCR).
Traffic control covers the entire network, not just certain equipment. The MA5100 is at
the access layer, so it is generally required to make traffic control on the MA5100 to
reduce the burst of service traffic and make the traffic stable.
Table 7-3 lists the location of traffic configurations in the networking of Radium 8750
and the MA5100.
7-3

Table 7-3 Traffic control configurations in Radium 8750 and MA5100

Application
LAN
interconnection
ADSL service
Traffic
direction
MA5100
Radium 8750
Upstream
Traffic control on the LAN
No traffic control
Downstream
UPC control by MMXC
No traffic control
Upstream
Restricted by physical lines in the

ADSL interface
No traffic control
Downstream
UPC control by MMXC
No traffic control
General traffic parameter configurations recommended are as follows:

z
Common users use the UBR traffic model, and select the traffic type of
NO_CLP_NO_SCR.
ADSL subscribers uses rt-VBR traffic model, and select the traffic type of
NO_CLP_SCR_CDVT.
7.4 Configuring Traffic Control Strategy

If the data in a traffic rank table are not used, it can be modified. The system provides
default service levels, which are recommended for application. Do not modify the traffic
rank unless the default traffic rank cannot meet the requirement. Before modifying a
traffic rank, consider carefully to prevent frequent modifications in the future.
I. Configuring traffic rank

The command modify rate table row is used to modify the exiting traffic rank.
Note:
z
Make sure the number of quotation for the traffic rank to be modified is 0. A quoted traffic rank cannot
be modified.
The new traffic rank value cannot be the same as an existing one.
MA5100(config)#modify rate table row

{ prevalue<0,599039> }:64
{ newvalue<0,599039> }:100
Modify rate record failed

Old value is used by traffic table
7-4

MA5100(config)#modify rate table row

{ prevalue<0,599039> }:128
{ newvalue<0,599039> }:256
Modify rate record failed

New value has already existed
II. Displaying traffic rank

The command show rank is used to display existing traffic ranks in the traffic rank table,
as well as the reference time (Ref.Count) of a traffic rank.
MA5100(config)#show rate table row
-------------------------------------------------Index
Rank(kbps)
Ref.count
64
128
256
512
1729
1024
1500
2048
2500
6000
8000
10
9000
11
10000
1711
12
12000
13
20000
14
45000
15
100000
--------------------------------------------------
7.5 Configuring Traffic Table

I. Displaying traffic table
The command show traffic table is used to help you make sure that the index of the
to-be-added traffic does not exist.
If you specify the index number, only the designated traffic table information can be
shown. For example:
7-5

{ index<K>|from-index<K>|srvcategory<K> }:Index
{ row-index<0,511> }:0
--------------------------------TD Table
TD Index
: 0
TD Type
: NoClpNoScr
Service category : cbr

Usage Count
: 0
EnPPDISC
: off
EnEPDISC
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 1024 kbps
---------------------------------
from-index and to-index are used to specify the range of the index, for example:
MA5100(config)#show traffic table
{ index<K>|from-index<K> }:from-index
{ row-index<0,5119> }:0
{ <cr>|to-index<K> }:
----------------------------------------------------------------Traffic type definition:
1:NoTrafficDescriptor
2:NoClpNoScr
3:ClpNoTaggingNoScr
4:ClpTaggingNoScr
5:NoClpScr
6:ClpNoTaggingScr
7:ClpTaggingScr
8:ClpNoTaggingMcr
9:ClpTransparentNoScr
10:ClpTransparentScr
11:NoClpTaggingNoScr
12:NoClpNoScrCdvt
13:NoClpScrCdvt
14:ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
15:ClpTaggingScrCdvt
TID Service Traf CLP01PCR CLP0PCR CLP01SCR CLP0SCR MBS CDVT
Type
Type kbps
kbps
kbps
kbps
PPD/EPD/SHAPE
cells 1/10us
-------------------------------------------------------------------0
cbr
1024
--
--
--
--
--
off/off/--
cbr
2500
--
--
--
--
--
off/off/--
ubr
512
--
--
--
--
--
on /on /--
nrt-vbr 5
1200
--
600
--
250
--
on /on /--
rt-vbr
128
15
--
--
64
300
10000000 on /on /--
Note:
By default, there are five traffic table items, with TID ranging 0-4. They can be quoted directly.
7-6

II. Adding or deleting a traffic table item

The command no traffic table is used to delete a traffic table item. After a traffic table
item is added successfully, its TID will display for later reference or for other operations
like deleting the item.
MA5100(config)#traffic table
{ index<K>|srvcategory<K> }:srvcategory
{ ubr<K>|cbr<K>|rt-vbr<K>|nrt-vbr<K> }:cbr
{ tdtype<K> }:tdtype
{ NoClpNoScr<K>|ClpNoTaggingNoScr<K>|ClpTaggingNoScr<K>|ClpTransparentNoSc
r<K>|NoClpNoScrCdvt<K> }:noclpnoscr
{ Clp01Pcr<K> }:clp01Pcr
{ pcrval<0,599039> }:50
Attention: 50 has been adjusted to rank of 64 <kbps>

Create TD record successfully
--------------------------------------------------------TD Table
TD Index
: 5
TD Type
: NoClpNoScr
Service category : cbr

UsedCount
: 0
EnPPDISC
: off
EnEPDISC
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 64 kbps
--------------------------------------------------------
Note:
z
If service type of the added traffic item is CBR or rt-VBR, the CBR parameters CLP01PCR, CLP0PCR
and rt-VBR parameters CLP01SCR, CLP0SCR must be selected from the existing values in the traffic
table. Otherwise, the system will adjust it to a value automatically.
A maximum of 512 traffic items are supported. The configured traffic must be smaller than the system
processing capacity.
The command no traffic table is used to delete a traffic item.

MA5100(config)#no traffic table
{ index<K> }:index
{ row-index<0,5119> }:0
7-7

Release TD record failed

Default TD Table, deleting inhibited
Note:
z
The default traffic item (ITD 0-4) cannot be deleted.
Only the traffic item with Ref.Count as 0 can be deleted.
7-8

Chapter 8 PVC Configuration

The MA5100 supports PVC between two different ports. The ports that support this
feature include: ADSL, LAN, ATM, FR, CES-V35, CES-UDT, CES-SDT, CES-UNI, IMA
and E3.
Table 8-1 lists the commands for PVC configuration.
Table 8-1 PVC configuration commands
Operation
Command
Mode
Adding or deleting a PVC
(no)pvc
Privileged mode
Displaying PVC information
show pvc
Privileged mode
8.1 Configuration Procedures

The PVC configuration procedures are as follows:
z
Defining PVC types
Configuring traffic parameters
Displaying board bandwidth
Configuring a PVC according to interactive prompts
Note:
This chapter introduces the general procedures for PVC configuration. For specific meanings of the
parameters, refer to Chapter 2 in the part Service Configuration.
8.1.1 Defining PVC Types

The MA5100 supports various types of PVC. Table 8-2 lists the most frequently used
PVC types.
Table 8-2 Frequently used PVC types
Type
Application
ADSL/SHDSL --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
8-1
ATM-DSLAM

Type
Application
ADSL/SHDSL --- LAN
IP-DSLAM
ADSL --- IMA
ADSL over low-speed ATM network
ADSL --- E3
ADSL over coaxial cable
LAN --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
LAN interconnection
CES-SDT --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
CES service over ATM network
CES-UDT --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
CES-UNI --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
CES-V35 --- ATM/AIU (optical interface)
FR ---ATM/AIU (optical interface)
FR service over ATM network
8.1.2 Configuring Traffic Types

When you configure a PVC, you need to specify the traffic type from the existing ones
for the PVC. You can select the default items (TID=1-4) or use the command traffic to
configure one.
8.1.3 Displaying Board Bandwidth

Each board or port of the MA5100 occupies a fixed bandwidth. The traffic you configure
cannot exceed the allowed bandwidth for the board or the port. The command show
bandwidth is used to view the bandwidth. For example:
MA5100(config)#show bandwidth
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8>|frame/slot<S><3,4>|frame<K>|sar<K> }:0/10
-------------------------------------------------Up
Total
BandWidth(kbps):40000
Down Total
BandWidth(kbps):40000
Up
Alloced BandWidth(kbps):6000
Down Alloced BandWidth(kbps):6000

--------------------------------------------------
8.1.4 Configuring the PVC

I. Displaying current PVCs on the port
The command show pvc is used to confirm whether the PVC already exists.
8-2

II. Creating the PVC

The command pvc is used to create a PVC.
The following example shows how to create a PVC between the ADSL port and the
ATM optical port.
1)
Input the frame number, slot number and port number of the ADSL board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-udt<K>|ima<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:adsl
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8> }:0/14/10
2)
Input VPI and VCI parameters.
The vpi/vci must be consistent with that of the ADSL Modem connected with the ADSL
board. The default values are 0/35.
{ region<K>|vpi<K>|adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shd
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ adsl<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
3)
Input the frame number, slot number and port number of the MMXC board.
The ATM port number on the MMXC ranges 8~11.

{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K> }:atm
4)
Configure VPI and VCI for the PVC.
{ cast-type<K>|vpi<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ cast-type<K>|vci<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:40
5)
Specify the PVC type.
There are four types of PVCs: p2p, p2mp, group, and group_p2p. Only p2p is
supported here.
{ cast-type<K> }:cast-type
{ type<E><p2p,p2mp,group,group_p2p> }:p2p
6)
Specify the traffic parameter.
The receiving traffic parameter rx-cttr and the transmitting traffic parameter tx-cttr
quote the TIDs directly. You are recommended to use the default TIDs. If the default
TIDs cannot satisfy the demand, create a new TID by yourself.
rx-cttr and tx-cttr can quote different traffic table items, but the service type of the
items must be the same.
8-3

To implement traffic control on a PVC, you have to enable UPC, or enable the early
packet discard (EPD) and partial packet discard (PPD) in the traffic table referred.
When CBR service is selected, UPC is disabled. When other services are selected,
UPC, EPD and PPD switches can all be opened.
You can use the command show traffic table to view EPD and UPD configuration
before referring to the traffic table items.
UBR is selected for ADSL service. In the following example, TID 2 is quoted.
{ rx-cttr<K> }:rx-cttr
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ upc<E><off,on> }:on
{ tx-cttr<K> }:tx-cttr
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
Note:
rx-cttr and tx-cttr are related to the destination end of the PVC. For example, when a PVC is created
between the ADSL board and the MMXC board, the source port is the ADSL port, and the destination port
is the ATM optical port. Make sure the traffic parameters are selected correctly.
7)
PVC index number returns.
After the configuration, a PVC index number (CID) returns. A CID exclusively identifies
a PVC, and is the basis for further operations on the PVC.
Create pvc successfully! connection ID = 24
The command no pvc is used to delete a PVC.
III. Displaying the PVC

The command show pvc is used to display the result of your operation.
8.2 Remarks
VPI shall be used to identity service types and office direction. For example, you can
define VPI 1~10 for ADSL service, VPI 11 for LAN service, VPI 12 for FR service and
VIP 13 for CES respectively.
8-4

If VPI resource is not enough, use VPI to identify the office directions, and use VCI to
identify service types.
8-5

Chapter 9 NMS Configuration

The MA5100 supports both inband and outband network management systems (NMS).
Inband NMS: The management information exchanged between the managed device
and the NMS is transmitted over the service channel that is provided by the managed
device.
Outband NMS: The management information exchanged between the device and NMS
is transmitted through a special maintenance channel provided by an independent
device. Because of this, outband NMS is more reliable than inband NMS, and is able to
pinpoint the faults in time when the managed device fails.
Generally, both inband NMS and outband NMS are configured in actual application.
Table 9-1 lists the commands for NMS configuration.
Table 9-1 NMS configuration commands
Operation
Command
Mode
Configuring IP address for the ETH port
atmlan neti
Privileged mode
Configuring the mapping of IP-PVC
atmlan arp
Privileged mode
Configuring IP address for the ATM port
atmlan ip-address atm
Privileged mode
Displaying IP address of the ATM port
show atmlan ip-address
User EXEC mode
Adding/deleting an ATM route
(no)atmlan ip-route
Privileged mode
Displaying the routing table
show atmlan ip-route
User EXEC mode
Adding/deleting an IP-access list
(no)atmlan ip-access
Privileged mode
Displaying the IP-access list
show atmlan ip-access
User EXEC mode
Adding/deleting an IP-refuse list
(no)atmlan ip-refuse
Privileged mode
Displaying the IP-refuse list
show atmlan ip-refuse
User EXEC mode
9.1 Configuring Outband NMS

The MA5100 supports outband NMS through its ETH port or CON port. Refer to
Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration for the configuration of outband NMS through serial
port. This section focuses on the configuration of outband NMS through the Ethernet
port.
9-1

Note:
The LAN board must work in general mode when outband NMS is used.
Before the ETH port can be used for network management, the following procedures
must be finished:
1)
Configuring IP address for the ETH port
2)
Configuring outband NMS route
3)
Configuring Ethernet firewall
4)
Adding the NMS workstation.
9.1.1 Configuring IP Address for the ETH Port

I. Displaying the IP address
The ETH port (the port number is always 1) is the default network port for maintenance
of the MA5100, and it cannot be deleted.
The command show atmlan netif is used to display the IP address of the ETH port.
The IP address of the ETH port must be in the same network segment with that of the
maintenance terminal or the gateway. Before configuring the IP address, first display
the configuration information of the port. For example:
MA5100(config)#show atmlan netif
{ <cr>|ifNo.<1,2> }:
-----------------------------------------------------------------If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------1
Ethernet
10.11.104.142
255.255.252.0
usable
ATM
10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0
usable
------------------------------------------------------------------
If-No: It indicates the interface ID

If-Type: It indicates the interface type, which can be Ethernet or ATM.
II. Configuring the IP address

The command atmlan ip-address ethernet is used to change the IP address and
mask of the port.
The following example shows how to configure the IP address for the ETH port as
10.11.106.133.
9-2

MA5100#atmlan ip-address
{ ethernet<K>|atm<K> }:ethernet
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.106.133
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.252.0
Note:
After you have changed the IP address of the ETH port, you are recommended to keep a record to
facilitate future query.
After the IP address is configured, you can use the command show atmlan
ip-address to display the configuration. For example:
MA5100(config)#show atmlan ip-address
{ ifNo.<1,2> }:1
--------------------------------------------------If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
--------------------------------------------------1
Ethernet
10.11.106.133
255.255.255.0
---------------------------------------------------
9.1.2 Configuring Outband NMS Route

If the IP address of the ETH port of the MA5100 is not in the same network segment
with that of the NMS workstation, the NMS route must be configured to forward IP
packets through the gateway. The procedures are described below.
I. Adding/deleting an NMS route

The command atmlan ip-route is used to add an NMS route. A maximum of 15 NMS
routes can be configured for the MA5100.
The following example shows how to add a route to network segment 10.11.8.0 where
the NMS workstation is located, and all the IP packets destined to 10.11.8.0 are
forwarded through the gateway 10.11.104.1.
MA5100(config)#atmlan ip-route
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.8.0
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.252.0
{ gateway(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.104.1
The command no atmlan ip-route is used to delete any idle route.
9-3

II. Displaying the configuration

The command show atmlan ip-route is used to display the configuration, for example:
MA5100(config)#show atmlan ip-route
-----------------------------------------------------------------Index
Dst-IPAddr
Net-mask
Gateway
Interface
-----------------------------------------------------------------1
10.11.8.0
255.255.252.0
10.11.104.1
10.11.104.142
------------------------------------------------------------------
9.1.3 Configuring Ethernet Firewall
Note:
When the firewall is enabled, only IP addresses in the ip-access list and not in the ip-refuse list can access
the MA5100 for outband network management.
I. Enabling/disabling firewall
The command atmlan firewall ethernet is used to enable the firewall. The firewall
must be enabled before the ip-access list and ip-refuse list can take effect.
By default, the firewall is disabled, which means that the MA5100 can be accessed
from any IP address if the route is correct.
Note:
The command atmlan firewall ethernet is valid only for the ETH port.
MA5100#atmlan firewall
{ ethernet<K> }:ethernet
II. Displaying firewall status

The command show atmlan firewall is used to display the status of the firewall.
MA5100#show atmlan firewall
{ ethernet<K> }:ethernet
Ethernet firewall is enabled
9-4

III. Adding/deleting an IP-access list

The command atmlan ip-access is used to add an address segment that is allowed to
access the MA5100, and the access list becomes effective immediately after the
command is executed. For example:
MA5100#atmlan ip-access
{ start-ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.104.140
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M>|end-ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.104.145
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.252.0
The command no atmlan ip-access is used to delete the address segment that is no
longer allowed to access the MA5100.
Note:
z
Before adding an IP-access list, check the existing IP-access list first. The to-be-added IP address
cannot repeat with existing ones.
A maximum of 20 IP-access lists can be added.
IV. Adding/deleting an IP-refuse list

The command atmlan ip-refuse is used to prevent an IP address segment with
potential hazard from accessing to the MA5100.
The command no atmlan ip-refuse is used to delete a refused IP address from the list.
If you need to deny the access from an IP address in a certain address section of an
address segment, you can first add the address segment into the IP-access list, and
then add the address section into the IP-refuse list.
The following example shows how to deny the access from IP address section
10.11.2.10, 10.11.3.20, 255.255.255.0 from the network segment 10.11.0.0,
10.11.255.255, 255.255.0.0
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.0.0
MA5100#atmlan ip-refuse
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
9-5

Note:
z
Before adding an IP-refuse list, check the existing IP-refuse list first. The to-be-added IP address
cannot repeat with existing ones.
A maximum of 20 IP-refuse lists can be added.
9.1.4 Adding an NMS Workstation

Refer to 9.3 for details.
9.2 Configuring Inband NMS

Outband NMS has its limitations when the MA5100 is away from the NMS LAN. For this
reason, inband NMS is also configured for the MA5100.
The MA5100 inband NMS adopts IPoA and RFC1483B.
Note:
IPoA is used for ATM-DSLAM application, while 1483B is used for IP-DSLAM application.
Inband NMS configurations include these procedures:

1)
Configuring the MA5100 inband NMS IP address
2)
Configuring inband NMS ARP connection
3)
Configuring inband NMS route
4)
Adding an IP-access list
5)
Adding an NMS workstation.
To improve the system security, the MA5100 analyzes the source address of a received
IP packet. If the address is not within the IP-access list, or it is within the IP-access list
and the IP-refuse list as well, the packet is considered insecure and will be discarded.
9.2.1 Adding ATM Network Interface

The inband NMS of the MA5100 is implemented through the MA5100 ATM network
interface, which must be added before you configure the inband NMS.
9-6

I. Adding an ATM interface

Initially the system has no ATM interface, and you can use the command atmlan netif
to add an ATM interface or a maximum of two ATM interfaces.
The command atmlan netif is used to add the ATM interface, for example:
MA5100#atmlan netif
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.10.10.10
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
After that, you can use the command show atmlan netif to display the configuration,
for example:
MA5100#show atmlan netif
{ <cr>|ifNo.<1,3> }:
-----------------------------------------------------------------If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------1
Ethernet
10.11.104.142
255.255.252.0
usable
ATM
10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0
usable
------------------------------------------------------------------
II. Modifying IP address for the ATM network interface

The command atmlan ip-address is used to modify the information of any existing
ATM network interface. For example:
MA5100#atmlan ip-address
{ ethernet<K>|atm<K> }:atm
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.10.10
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
{ ifNo.<2,3> }:2
III. Deleting an ATM interface

The command no atmlan netif is used to delete an ATM interface.
IV. Displaying the IP address

The command show atmlan ip-address is used to display the information of the
current ATM interface. You need to input the interface ID in the command, in which 1 is
for the Ethernet interface, and 2 and 3 are for the ATM interfaces. For example:
MA5100#show atmlan ip-access
{ ifNo.<1,3> }:2
---------------------------------------------------
9-7

If-No
If-Type
Interface
SubnetMask
--------------------------------------------------2
ATM
10.11.10.10
255.255.255.0
---------------------------------------------------
9.2.2 Configuring ARP Connection

To establish an inband NMS channel, the ARP connection must be established.
The MA5100 supports the ARP connections that comply with IPoA and 1483B. The
command atmlan arp is used for the configuration.
I. Establishingthe ARP connection based on IPoA.

1)
Input the peer IPoA address
MA5100#atmlan arp
{ rfc1483b<K>|ipoa<K> }:ipoa
{ ip-address }:10.11.10.1
The address you input here is the inband NMS IP address of the upper-layer device
that connects with the MA5100.
2)
Input the VPI and VCI values
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
3)
Input the frame/slot/port number of the AIUA board that supports the inband NMS
4)
Input the flow control parameters.
{ <cr>|rx-cttr<0,5119> }:
Press <Enter> to complete the configuration. The default flow table item, which is
nrt-VNR with TID as 3 will be used.
If the default flow table item is not desired, you need to add a desired table item first.
5)
Create the ARP index values

Create an ATMLAN ARP, ARP index = 0
The ARP connection can be deleted according to the values.
II. Establishing the ARP connection based on rfc1483b

The method to establish the ARP connection is introduced as follows, provided that the
inband NMS channel is provided by the LAN board:
1)
Encapsulate IP packets in the Logical Link Control (LLC) format according to the
rfc1483b protocol
MA5100#atmlan arp
{ rfc1483b<K>|ipoa<K> }:rfc1483b
9-8

{ llc<K>|vc<K> }:llc
2)
Input the frame/slot number of the LAN board and the VLAN ID
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8>|frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/9
{ groupindex<K>|vlanid<K> }:vlanid
{ vlanid<1,4095> }:100
{ <cr>|rx-cttr<0,511> }:
Note:
z
The LAN board supports the inband NMS when working in General mode or IPDSLAM mode. The
NMS VLAN shall be the general VLAN or logical VLAN;
No configuration needs for the logical VLAN, and just an idle VLAN ID is needed; and
The general VLAN needs to be configured in LAN board configuration mode. See the Chapter 3
Configuring LAN Board in Service Configuration for the configuration.
3)
Create the ARP index values

The ARP connection can be deleted according to the values.
III. Displaying/deleting an ARP connection

1)
The command show atmlan arp is used to display all ARP connections.
MA5100#show atmlan arp

-------------------------------------------------------------------Index Destination
VPI
VCI F/S /P
RxCttr
TxCttr
If-No
State
-------------------------------------------------------------------0 1483B LLC
--
1 192.168.0.1
10
-- 0/9 /100
100 0/4 /0
usable
usable
--------------------------------------------------------------------
2)
The command no atmlan arp is used to delete any designated ARP connection.
MA5100#no atmlan arp

{ index<0,65535> }:0
Deleting ARP may effect connection, are you sure?(y/n) [n]:y
Delete an ATMLAN ARP, ARP index = 0
9.2.3 Configuring NMS Route

Refer to 9.1.2 for details.
9-9

9.2.4 Configuring the Firewall

Firewall configuration includes the following procedures.
I. Defining the IP-access list

The MA5100 supports flexible management modes, including NMS and Telnet
command line. Configuration of firewall is one of the most important aspects in the
security plan of the MA5100. By default, access from any IP address that is not in the
same network segment with the MA5100 ETH port or ATM port will be denied.
II. Adding/deleting an IP-access list

The MA5100 is configured with outband firewall and inband firewall. The outband
firewall is disabled by default, and can be enabled or disabled by using the command
atmlan firewall ethernet. The inband firewall is always enabled, and you cannot
control its state by using the commands.
If you expect to access the MA5100 ATM port from a terminal, the IP address of the
terminal must be added to the IP-access list of the MA5100.
The operations for adding or deleting IP-access list and IP-refuse list are the same with
those in 9.1.3 .

Refer to 9.3 below for details.
9.3 Configuring NMS Workstation

An NMS workstation must be configured before the MA5100 can be managed by the
NMS. Table 9-2 lists the commands.
Table 9-2 Commands for NMS workstation configuration
Operation
Command
Mode
Adding or deleting an NMS workstation
(no)nms name
User EXEC mode
Activating an NMS workstation
nms activate
User EXEC mode
Deactivating an NMS workstation
nms deactivate
User EXEC mode
Displaying information of an NMS workstation
show nms
User EXEC mode
Modifying an NMS workstation
nms modify
User EXEC mode
9-10


The command nms name is used to add an NMS workstation. For example:
MA5105#user name
{ name<S><1,31> }:Huawei
{ ip }:10.11.10.1
{ getcommunity<S><1,15> }:ma5100
{ setcommunity<S><1,15> }:ma5100
name: It identifies an NMS workstation uniquely.

ip: It is the IP address of the NMS workstation specified by yourself, which cannot be in
the same network segment with that of the user IP address.
getcommunity/setcommunity: A string of no more than 15 characters. The
community name serves as a weak form of SNMP authentication, just like a user
password. The MA5100 accepts or rejects a request from the NMS workstation by
comparing the GET/SET community name with that configured in the NMS workstation.
When a community name is added or deleted in the MA5100, the same changes must
be made in the NMS workstation as well. Otherwise, NMS request would be rejected.
Community name is case sensitive.
After the configuration, you can use the command show nms to display the information
about the NMS workstation.
MA5100#show nms
{ <cr>|name<K>|ip<K> }:
NMS record No.:0

NMS name
:huawei
NMS getcomm
:ma5100
NMS setcomm
:ma5100
NMS address
:10.11.10.1
NMS state
:deactive
9.3.2 Deleting an NMS Workstation

The command no nms name is used to delete an NMS workstation if it is no longer
used.
9-11

Note:
Only a deactivated NMS workstation can be deleted. An active NMS must be deactivated by using the
command nms deactivate before it can be deleted.
The name and IP address of an NMS workstation are both exclusive, so you can delete
the specific NMS workstation by designating any one of them.
MA5100#no nms
{ name<K>|ip<K> }:name
{ nmsname<S><1,31> }:huawei
9.3.3 Activating/Deactivating an NMS Workstation

After an NMS workstation is added, it must be activated before the configuration can
take effect.
The command activate is used to activate an NMS workstation, while the command
deactivate is used to deactivate an NMS workstation. For example:
MA5100#nms activate
MA5100#nms deactivate
9.3.4 Displaying NMS Workstation Information

The command show nms is used to display the information about an NMS workstation.
For example:
MA5100#show nms
{ <cr>|name<K>|ip<K> }:
NMS record No.:0

NMS name
:huawei
NMS getcomm
:ma5100
NMS setcomm
:ma5100
NMS address
:10.11.10.1
NMS state
:active
9-12

9.3.5 Modifying an NMS Workstation

The command nms modify is used to modify the configuration of an NMS workstation,
including the name or IP address of the NMS workstation, and the GET/SET
community names. For example:
MA5100#nms modify
{ name<K>|ip<K> }:ip
{ address }:10.11.10.1
{ getcomm<K>|setcomm<K>|name<K> }:getcomm
{ getcommunity<S><1,15> }:shenzhen
Note:
z
An activated NMS workstation cannot be modified or deleted. You can deactivate it first, then make the
modification.
After the GET/SET community names are changed, the same modification must be made in the NMS
workstation as well.
After the modification, you can use the command show nms to display the result.
9.4 Configuration Example

9.4.1 Configuring Inband NMS in ATM-DSLAM Networking
I. Networking
In ATM-DSLAM networking, the MA5100 provides the inband NMS channel through the
number 0 optical interface on the AIUA board, and adopts IPoA for the inband NMS.
See Figure 9-1 for ATM-DSLAM inband NMS networking.
9-13

IP: 192.168.0.1
Port: 5/5
VPI/VCI: 10/100
ISN 8850
10.11.0.2
IP: 192.168.0.2
Slot/Port : 4/0
VPI/VCI: 10/100
NMS workstation
10.11.0.1
MA5100
Figure 9-1 ATM-DSLAM inband NMS

1)
The NMS workstation IP address is: 10.11.0.1, and the subnet mask is:
255.255.255.0;
2)
The IP address of ISN 8850 is: 10.11.0.2, an the subnet mask is: 255.255.255.0;
the IP address of the NMS interface is: 192.168.0.1, and the subnet mask is:
255.255.255.0; NMS interface VPI/VCI: 10/100;
3)
The MA5100 inband NMS IP address is: 192.168.0.2, and the subnet mask is:
255.255.255.0; the inband NMS VPI/VCI: 10/100.
II. MA5100 inband NMS configuration

1)
Configuring an inband NMS IP address
MA5100#atmlan netif
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:192.168.0.2
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
2)
Configuring an ARP connection
MA5100#atmlan arp
{ rfc1483b<K>|ipoa<K> }:ipoa
{ ip-address(A.B.C.D) }:192.168.0.1
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8>|frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/4/0
{ vpi<0,4095> }:10
{ vci<32,65535> }:100
{ <cr>|rx-cttr<0,511> }:
3)
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
MA5100#atmlan ip-access 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.254 255.255.255.0
4)
Adding an NMS route

9-14

MA5100#atmlan ip-route
{ ip-address(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.0.0
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
{ gateway(A.B.C.D) }:192.168.0.1
5)
Adding an NMS workstation
MA5100#nms name huawei 10.11.0.1 public private
6)
Activating the NMS workstation
MA5100#nms activate ip 10.11.0.1
7)
Saving data
MA5100#save
9.4.2 Configuring Inband NMS in IP-DSLAM Networking

I. Networking
In IP-DSLAM networking, the MA5100 provides the inband NMS channel through the
number 0 port on LAN, and adopts RFC1483B for inband NMS. See Figure 9-2 for
IP-DSLAM inband NMS networking.
IP: 10.11.0.2
IP: 192.168.0.1
VLAN ID: 1000
Router
IP: 192.168.0.2
Slot/Port : 4/0
VLAN ID: 1000
NMS workstation
10.11.0.1
MA5100
Figure 9-2 IP-DSLAM inband NMS

1)
The LAN board on the MA5100 supports the inband NMS configuration when
working in General mode or IPDSLAM mode. In this example, the LAN board
works on IPDSLAM mode and connects to the router through the number 0 port.
2)
The MA5100 inband NMS IP address is: 192.168.0.2, and the subnet mask is:
255.255.255.0;
3)
The MA5100 inband NMS only supports general VLAN and logical VLAN, and
does not support region VLAN. The logical VLAN is used in this example, VLAN
ID=1000;
4)
The NMS workstation IP address is: 10.11.0.1, and the subnet mask is:
255.255.255.0.
9-15

II. MA5100 inband NMS configuration

1)
Configuring an inband NMS IP address:
MA5100#atmlan netif
{ ipaddress(A.B.C.D) }:192.168.0.2
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
2)
Configuring an ARP connection
MA5100#atmlan arp
{ rfc1483b<K>|ipoa<K> }:rfc1483b
{ llc<K>|vc<K> }:llc
{ frame/slot/port<S><5,8>|frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/4
{ groupindex<K>|vlanid<K> }:vlanid
{ vlanid<1,4095> }:1000
{ <cr>|rx-cttr<0,511> }:
3)
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
MA5100#atmlan ip-access 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.254 255.255.255.0
4)
Adding an NMS route
MA5100#atmlan ip-route
{ ip-address(A.B.C.D) }:10.11.0.0
{ mask(A.B.C.D)<M> }:255.255.255.0
{ gateway(A.B.C.D) }:192.168.0.1
5)
Adding an NMS workstation
MA5100#nms name huawei 10.11.0.1 public private
6)
Activating the NMS workstation
MA5100#nms activate ip 10.11.0.1
7)
Saving data
MA5100#save
9-16
HUAWEI

Module
Operation Manual
Part 2 Service Configuration
Operation Manual Service Configuration

SmartAX MA5100 Multi-service Access Module
Table of Contentsf
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Configuring xDSL Boards........................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Configuring ADSL Boards.................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Blocking/Unblocking an ADSL Port......................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Configuring an ADSL Profile ................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Activating/Deactivating an ADSL Port................................................................... 1-11
1.1.4 Displaying ADSL Port Information......................................................................... 1-12
1.2 Configuring SHLA Board ................................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.1 Configuring SHDSL Line Profile............................................................................ 1-17
1.2.2 Configuring SHDSL Alarm Profile ......................................................................... 1-22
1.2.3 Blocking/Unblocking an SHDSL Port .................................................................... 1-26
1.2.4 Activating/Deactivating an SHDSL Port ................................................................ 1-26
1.2.5 Binding/Unbinding SHDSL Ports........................................................................... 1-27
1.2.6 Enabling/Disabling SHDSL Port Loopback ........................................................... 1-27
1.2.7 Configuring Power Backoff for an SHDSL Port..................................................... 1-28
1.2.8 Commands for Querying SHDSL Port Information ............................................... 1-28
Chapter 2 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Service.............................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Introduction to ATMDSLAM Service ................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Configuring PVC for xDSL-ATM Service ........................................................................... 2-2
2.2.1 Configuring PVC for ADSL-ATM Service................................................................ 2-2
2.2.2 Configuring PVC for SHDSL-ATM Service ............................................................. 2-3
2.3 Configuration Example of xDSL-ATM Service................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 ADSL Configuration Example Rate Restriction on Port....................................... 2-5
2.3.2 ADSL Configuration Example Rate Restriction on PVC ...................................... 2-7
2.3.3 SHDSL Configuration Example............................................................................. 2-10
Chapter 3 Configuring LAN Board............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Introduction to LAN Board ................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Configuring the LAN Board................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 Changing the Operation Mode of LAND ................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Configuring LAND Port............................................................................................ 3-5
3.2.3 Enabling/Disabling Loopback of LAND ................................................................. 3-10
3.2.4 Setting LAND Port Mirror ...................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.5 Setting Maximum Learning of MAC Address for PVC .......................................... 3-12
3.2.6 Setting CAR........................................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.7 Configuring the 802.1p Priority Function............................................................... 3-14
3.2.8 Setting Traffic Suppression for Broadcast/Multicast/Unknown Uicast .................. 3-15
3.2.9 Configuring Trunk.................................................................................................. 3-16

Table of Contentsf
Chapter 4 Configuring LAN Interconnection.............................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 LAN Interconnection Applications...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Typical Applications ................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.2 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Configuration Examples..................................................................................................... 4-4
Chapter 5 Configuring IP-DSLAM Service .................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Principles ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Configuring IP-DSLAM Service PVC ...................................................................... 5-4
5.2 Configuration Example (Region VLAN) ............................................................................. 5-6
5.3 Configuration Example (Logical VLAN) ............................................................................. 5-9
Chapter 6 Configuring Multicast Service .................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Configuring Multicast Application....................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Configuring NTV...................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Configuring Multicast Program Library.................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3 Configuring an IGMP Profile ................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.4 Configuring IGMP User ........................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.5 Configuring IGMP PVC ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.6 Querying the Received Multicast Stream.............................................................. 6-10
6.2.7 Querying Traffic Statistics of a Program ............................................................... 6-11
6.3 Application Examples ...................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3.1 MA5100 Multicast Networking............................................................................... 6-12
6.3.2 Configuration Procedures ..................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.3 Configuration Example for IP-DSLAM Multicast Application ................................ 6-15
6.3.4 Configuration Example for ATM-DSLAM Multicast Application ............................ 6-18
Chapter 7 Configuring IMA Service ............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Setting DIP Switches ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 IMA Configuration Commands........................................................................................... 7-2
7.3.1 Adding an IMA Group.............................................................................................. 7-2
7.3.2 Configuring IMA Group Mode ................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.3 Configuring an IMA Link.......................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.4 Configuring PVC...................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4 Configuration Examples..................................................................................................... 7-7
7.4.1 Networking Diagram................................................................................................ 7-7
7.4.2 Configuring the Main Node (MA5100) .................................................................... 7-8
7.4.3 Configuring the Sub Nodes ................................................................................... 7-10
Chapter 8 Configuring Local Cascading..................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-1
ii

Table of Contentsf
8.2 Features............................................................................................................................. 8-2

8.3 Hardware Configuration..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Service Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8-3
Chapter 9 Configuring Remote Cascading ................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Remote Cascading Using 155M Interface Subboard ........................................................ 9-1
9.2 Remote Cascading Using the IMA Subboard.................................................................... 9-4
9.3 Remote Cascading Using the E3 Subboard...................................................................... 9-4
iii
Operation Manual - Service Configuration

Chapter 1 Configuring xDSL Boards

The xDSL access services provided by the MA5100 include ADSL and SHDSL services.
The ADSL service is provided through the ADLE and ADLI service boards, while the
SHDSL service is provided through the SHLA service board.
Through interoperation with the MMXC, AIU and LAND interface boards, the above
service boards are able to provide ATM-DSLAM, IP-DSLAM and video multicasting
applications.
This chapter focuses on the configuration tasks of xDSL service boards, and the
applications are described in the following chapters.
1.1 Configuring ADSL Boards

Table 1-1 lists the configuration commands of ADSL boards.
Table 1-1 Commands for ADSL board configuration
Operation
Command
Command mode
Blocking or unblocking an ADSL port
(no) block
ADSL board configuration mode
Adding an ADSL profile
adsl profile add
Deleting an ADSL profile
adsl profile delete
Modifying an ADSL profile
adsl profile modify
Displaying an ADSL profile
show adsl profile
Activating an ADSL port.
activate
Deactivating an ADSL port
deactivate
Displaying ADSL Modem version
show modem
Displaying ADSL
parameters
show parameter
Displaying ADSL port statistics
show statistics
Displaying line parameters of an activated

port
show line
port
configuration
1-1

1.1.1 Blocking/Unblocking an ADSL Port

A Blocked port will become Deactive after it is unblocked. You need first to activate the
port before it can transmit service packets.
Figure 1-1 displays the change of status of a port.
activate
no block
Active
Deactive
Blocked
block
deactivate
block
Figure 1-1 Commands for changing board status
The command (no) block is used to block/unblock an ADSL port. After the command
has been executed, you can use the command show board to query the state of the
ADSL port.
To unblock all the ADSL ports, use the command no block all.
MA5100(config-ADSL-0/6)#no block
{ PortID<L><0,31>|all<K> }:all
Port 0: Unblocking successfully.
.
.
1.1.2 Configuring an ADSL Profile

When activated, every port must be configured with some parameters, which are
basically the same for all the ports. To ease your workload in the configuration, ADSL
profile is available in the MA5100. Through the ADSL profile, you can configure the
required parameters so that they can be referred to directly when the ADSL ports are
activated.
I. Adding an ADSL profile

The command adsl profile add is used to add an ADSL profile.
1-2

Note:
The MA5100 has a default ADSL profile with profile index being 1. This profile is recommended for
configuration of ordinary ADSL service.
Figure 1-2 illustrates the procedures for configuring an ADSL profile.
1-3

Configure ADSL profile

Set profile index
N
Use default?
Y
Set ADSL work mode
Select trellis coding
Select bit swap
Set framing mode and clock
Set EOC work mode
Select channel mode
Fast
interleaved
Select interleaved delay mode
Automatic
Manual
Set interleaved delay unit
ms
N
Set interleaved delay?

Y
DMT
Set interleaved depth?
N
Set interleaved
delay unit
Set max. downstream delay
Set max. downstream depth
Set max. upstream delay
Set max. upstream depth
Set Modem noise margin?
Set downstream noise margin

Set min. downstream noise margin
Set upstream noise margin
Set min. upstream noise margin
Set rate parameter?

Y
Set min. downstream rate

Set max. downstream rate
Set min. upstream rate
Set max. upstream rate
End
Figure 1-2 Procedures of configuring an ADSL profile

1-4

Descriptions of configuration parameters are as follows:

1)
Set ADSL profile index.
MA5100(config)#adsl profile add

{ <cr>|profile-index<L><2,99> }:
You can input a profile index, or press <Enter> directly to get one from the system. The
profile indexes cannot repeat with each other, because the index is the basis for future
operations on the profile, such as the modification or deletion operation.
Note:
If you press <Enter> directly, an index number will be allocated after the profile has been created
successfully.
2)
Whether to use default configuration.

Start profile adding.
During input, press 'Q' to quit, then settings at this time are neglected
Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:y
If there is no need to make basic configuration, input n, otherwise input y and follow the
prompts to make the basic configuration.
3)
Set ADSL operation mode.
ADSL operating mode:

0: All(G992.1, G992.2, T1.413)
>
1: Full rate(G992.1 or T1.413)
>
2: G992.2(g.lite) (ADLI board doesn't support g.lite operating mode)
>
3: T1.413 (ADLI board doesn't support T1.413 operating mode)
>
4: G992.1(g.dmt)
0: All(G992.1, G992.2, T1.413)
There are three ADSL operation modes available: G992.1, G992.2 and T1.413.
The G992.2 downstream rate is 1536 kbit/s, and upstream rate is 512 kbit/s, the
G992.1 and T1.413 downstream rate is 6144 kbit/s, and upstream rate is 640 kbit/s.
Note:
ADLI only supports G992.1 for ADSL over ISDN.
1-5

If the ADSL operation mode of the MA5100 is different from that of the ADSL Modem
(ATU-R), ADSL connection can not be set up. It is recommended to set the MA5100
ADSL operation mode as all, which means to support G992.1, G992.2 and T1.413
simultaneously.
4)
Set trellis coding.
Trellis coding 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [1]: 1
This item enables or disables trellis coding, an algorithm which helps improve
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) and the ADSL connection stability. You are recommended
to enable the trellis coding.
5)
Set bit swap.
When changes occur to an ADSL channel, the SNR of some carriers may be
deteriorated and these carriers cannot bear the allocated bits. Bit swap is able to send
the bits from one carrier to another to avoid possible disconnection.
Note:
z
Bit swap will not take effect unless it is supported by both the ADSL board and the user RTU.
By default, this function is disabled.
Bit swap occurs in upstream and downstream channels, and the configuration is like
this:
Upstream channel bit swap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [0]:0
Downstream channel bit swap 0-disable 1-enable (0~1) [0]: 0
6)
Set base framing mode.
Configuration base framing mode:

1: Full overhead synchronous mode
2: Dual latency with reduced overhead
3: Single latency with reduced overhead
Please select
(1~3) [3]:3
Three types of base framing mode are available: full overhead synchronous, dual
latency with reduced overhead and single latency with reduced overhead.
7)
Whether to enable network clock reference.
Network timing reference 0 disable 1-enable (0~1) [0]: 0
8)
Set embedded operation channel (EOC) mode.
EOC mode
0-transparent mode 1-HDLC framing mode (0~1) [1]: 1
1-6

The MA5100 provides centralized management of terminal devices. For this purpose,
the EOC mode must be configured as the HDLC.
9)
Select channel mode.

Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: 1
This item sets the operation mode of the port channel, which can be interleaved or fast.
By default, the channel mode is interleaved.
The interleaved mode is more stable but takes longer delay than the fast mode does.
The interleaved mode is recommended for ordinary access service, while the fast
mode is recommended for delay-sensitive services like Video On Demand (VOD).
If you select the fast mode, steps 10-17 are necessary.
10) Set interleaved delay mode.
Set interleaved delay mode
0-manual 1-auto(0~1) [0]: 0
This item sets whether to configure the interleaved mode manually or automatically.
When auto is selected, the system shall determine an optimal interleaved depth or
interleaved delay according to the line conditions.
11) Set interleaved delay unit.
Unit of interleaved delay 0-DMT 1-ms (0~1) [1]: 1
The interleaved delay unit can be DMT or ms. If you select DMT, proceed with steps 12,
13 and 14. If you select ms, proceed with steps 15, 16 and 17.
12) Whether to set interleaved depth.
Will you set interleave depth? (y/n) [n]: Y
A larger interleaved depth enables higher stability of the ADSL connection, but the
delay will also be longer.
13) Set the maximum downstream interleaved depth.
Max. downstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128)[8]:8
It is recommended to set the interleaved depth as 8.

14) Set the maximum upstream interleaved depth.
Max. upstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128) [8]:8
It is recommended to set the depth as 8.

15) Whether to set interleaved delay.
Will you set interleave depth? (y/n) [n]: y
16) Set the maximum downstream interleaved delay.

Max. downstream interleaved delay(5~255 ms) [6]:6
17) Set the maximum upstream interleaved delay.

1-7

Max. upstream interleaved delay(5~255 ms) [6]:6
18) Whether to set Modem noise margin.

Will you set noise margin for modem? (y/n) [n]: Y
Noise margin refers to the level of noise that is tolerable without deteriorating current
line rate and Bit Error Rate (BER). The setting of noise margin concerns the target
noise margin and the minimum noise margin.
The Modem noise margin is proportional to the stability of ADSL connection. The larger
the noise margin is, the higher the stability will be. However, the Modem noise margin is
inversely proportional to the line rate, which means the larger the Modem noise margin
is, the lower the line rate will be.
The default setting is recommended. To skip the setting, input n.
19) Set downstream target noise margin.
Target noise margin in downstream (0~15 dB) [12]: 12
Target noise margin is the allowed noise margin that guarantees normal
communication when the line noise is increasing. A larger margin ensures better
tolerance on line error than a smaller margin, but allows smaller rate.
Therefore the target noise margin should be adjusted based on the actual line
conditions. For high-quality lines, you can set a small target noise margin to ensure
high line rate. While for poor-quality lines, you can set a large target noise margin to
ensure higher link stability.
The target noise margin determines the ADSL line rate. Recommended downstream
noise margin is 12dB.
20) Set the minimum noise margin in downstream.
Min. noise margin in downstream (0~11 dB) [0]: 0
If the calculated target noise margin of an ADSL connection is less than the minimum
noise margin, the ADSL port can not be activated. So the minimum downstream noise
margin is set to 0dB.
21) Set upstream target noise margin.
Target noise margin in upstream (0~15 dB) [12]:12
22) Set the minimum upstream noise margin.

Min noise margin in upstream (0~11 dB) [0]:
23) Whether to set rate parameters.

Will you set parameters for rate? ( y/n ) [n]:Y
The rate is closely related to the ADSL link stability. Too high rate may cause poor
stability in ADSL connection. To skip the setting, input n.
1-8

24) Set the minimum downstream rate.

If you want the fixed rate, set the Min. value equal to Max. value.
Min. bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]: 32
If you want a fixed rate, you can set the minimum and maximum values to be the same.
However, this is not recommended because the actual rate may not be able to reach
the rate you have set.
If the calculated downstream rate of an ADSL line is less than the set minimum rate, the
ADSL port can not be activated. So it is recommended to set the minimum downstream
rate as 32 kbit/s.
25) Set the maximum downstream rate.
Max bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]: 6144
If the calculated downstream rate of an ADSL line is more than the maximum value set,
the rate will be limited at the set value. Meanwhile, the downstream noise margin will be
increased. If the quality of line is poor, and the calculated downstream rate is lower than
the maximum rate that has been set, the ADSL connection will be set up at the
calculated bit rate, while keeping the target downstream noise margin unchanged.
It is recommended to set the maximum rate in downstream at 6144 kbit/s to ensure the
connection stability.
26) Set the minimum upstream rate.
Min bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [32]: 32
The ADSL port will not be activated if the calculated upstream rate is less than the
minimum bit rate that has been set. It is recommended to set the minimum upstream
rate as 32 kbit/s.
27) Set the maximum upstream rate.
Max bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]: 640
If the calculated upstream rate of an ADSL line is more than the maximum value that
has been set, the bit rate will be limited at the set value. Meanwhile, the upstream noise
margin will be increased. If the line quality is poor, and the calculated upstream bit rate
is lower than the maximum bit rate that has been set, the ADSL connection will be set
up at the calculated bit rate, while keeping the target upstream noise margin
unchanged. It is recommended to set the maximum upstream rate at 640 kbit/s.
28) Profile configuration successful.
Add profile 2 successfully
When an ADSL profile has been configured successfully, a prompt will return, together
with the profile index, which is 2 in this example.
1-9

II. Deleting an ADSL profile

The command adsl profile delete is used to delete a designated ADSL profile.
Note:
z
The default ADSL profile (with profile index of 1) cannot be deleted.
The ADSL profile that is being used cannot be deleted.
III. Modifying an ADSL profile

The command adsl profile modify is used to modify a designated ADSL profile. The
procedures to modify a profile are the same with those for adding a profile.
Note:
z
When an ADSL line profile has been modified, the message Do you want the modified profile to take
effect now? (y/n)[y]: will display. Enter y to make the modification effective immediately. If your enter n,
the modification will not take effect until the system or the board is reset, or the port is activated again.
If you choose to validate the modification immediately, while the profile is being used by a port, this port
will be down temporarily. After the port is deactivated, it will be activated again with the new profile
parameters.
The default profile (with profile index 1) cannot be modified.
IV. Displaying the ADSL profile

The command show adsl profile is used to display a designated ADSL profile. For
example:
MA5100(config)#show adsl profile 1
{ <cr>|profile_index<L><1,99> }:1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
profile 1
: DEFVAL
ADSL run mode
: All(G992.1, G992.2, T1.413)
Trellis Mode
: Enable
Upstream channel bit swap
: Disable
Downstream channel bit swap
: Disable
CO Framing Mode
: Single latency with reduced overhead
1-10

NTR
: Disable
EOC mode
: HDLC framing mode
Channel mode
: Interleaved
Interleaved delay mode
: Manual
Unit of stream interleaved delay
: MS
Max. downstream interleaved depth/delay: 6

Max. upstream interleaved depth/delay
: 6
Target downstream noise margin(dB)
: 12
Min. downstream noise margin(dB)
: 0
Target upstream noise margin(dB)
: 12
Min. upstream noise margin(dB)
: 0
Min. downstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 32
Max. downstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 6144
Min. upstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 32
Max. upstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 640
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1.3 Activating/Deactivating an ADSL Port

Only an active ADSL port can transmit service packets. The activation refers to the
training process between an ADSL terminating unit at central office (ATU-C) and ADSL
terminating unit at remote end (ATU-R). During the training process, the line distance
and the line status will be checked based on the parameters you have set in the ADSL
profile, so that the ATU-C and ATU-R can negotiate and confirm that the MA5100 can
work normally under such conditions.
For an online ATU-R, the activation process ends right after the negotiation between
the ATU-R and ATU-C is completed successfully. When the ATU-R gets offline, the
communication terminates, and the ATU-C will be in its listening state. Once the ATU-R
gets online, the training process begins automatically.
The command activate is used to activate an ADSL port. To activate all ports at one
time, use the command activate all.
Note:
In initial state, the default ADSL profile (with profile index of 1) is used to activate all ADSL ports.
MA5100(config-adsl-0/14)#activate
{ PortID<L><0,31>|all<K> }:1
{ <cr>|profile-index<L><1,99> }:1
1-11

Send the command to activate port 1 successfully
The command deactivate is used to deactivate an ADSL port.

MA5100(config-adsl-0/14)#deactivate
{ portid<L><0,31>|all<K> }:1
Deactivate port 1 successfully
When an ADSL port is deactivated, the connection between the ATU-R and ATU-C is
terminated. To transmit service again, the port must be activated again first.
1.1.4 Displaying ADSL Port Information

I. Displaying Modem version
The command show modem is used to display the version information of local or
remote ADSL Modem. Modems on the same ADSL board at the office side have the
same version, so no parameter is required in the command. When querying the version
of a remote Modem, the port ID must be provided because the ATU-R connecting with
each port may not be the same.
The following example shows how to display information about the ADSL Modem at the
office side:
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show modem
{ atu-c<K>|atu-r<K> }:atu-c
-------------------------------------------------------Product ID
: 0xa8
Subscriber line type
: POTS
Chipset rom software version
: 01 04
Chipset rom software date
: May 01 2001 22:50:24
OAM software version
: 3 30
OAM software date
: Jun 25 2002 18:19:57
Diagnosis code software version
: 3 30
Modem code software version
: 3 30
Vendor ID
: 0x4
Chipset ID
: 0x0
ITU country code
: 0xb5
ITU provider code
: TSTC
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following example shows how to display information about the ADSL Modem on
the remote side:
A5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show modem atu-r
{ PortID<L><0,31> }:6
1-12

-------------------------------------------------------Vendor ID
: 0x0
Version
: 0x100
Vendor country ID
: 0x0
Provider code ID
: 0x4753504e(GSPN)
-------------------ADSL capability------------------T1.413 issue2
: not support
G992.1 POTS non-overlapped
: support
G992.1 POTS overlapped
: not support
G992.1 ISDN non-overlapped
: not support
G992.1 ISDN overlapped
: not support
G992.1 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
: not support
G992.1 with TCM-ISDN overlapped
: not support
G992.2 POTS non-overlapped
: support
G992.2 POTS overlapped
: not support
G992.2 with TCM-ISDN non-overlapped
: not support
G992.2 with TCM-ISDN overlapped
: not support
--------------------------------------------------------
II. Displaying ADSL port configuration parameters

The command show parameter is used to display ADSL port configuration parameters.
For example:
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show parameter
{ PortID<L><0,31>|all<K> }:0
-------------------------------------------------------Port
0:
configured by profile
1:
ADSL operating mode
: All(G992.1, G992.2, T1.413)
Trellis Mode
: Enable
: Disable
: Disable
CO Framing Mode
: Single latency with reduced overhead
NTR
: Disable
EOC mode
: Transparent mode
Channel mode
: Interleaved
Interleaved delay mode
: Configuration
Unit of stream interleaved delay
: MS
Max downstream interleaved depth/delay : 6

Max upstream interleaved depth/delay
: 6
Target downstream noise margin(dB)
: 12
Minimum downstream noise margin(dB)
: 0
1-13

Target upstream noise margin(dB)
: 12
Minimum upstream noise margin(dB)
: 0
Minimum downstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 32
Maximum downstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 6144
Minimum upstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 32
Maximum upstream bit rate(Kbps)
: 640
--------------------------------------------------------
III. Displaying ADSL port statistics

The command show statistics is used to display ADSL port statistics.
z
Displaying alarm statistics
If you select the parameter alarm, the alarm statistics for the ADSL port will be
displayed. You can choose to display the alarm statistics of the last 15 minutes, last 24
hours, current 24 hours and all the alarm statistics.
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show statistics
{ stat-type<E><alarm,performance> }:alarm
{ PortID<L><0,31> }:6
{ statistics-type<E><last-15minutes,last-24hours,current-24hours,ever-befo
re> }:last-15minutes
-------------------------------------------------------Near end LOS count
: 0
Near end high bit error count
: 0
Far end LOS count
: 0
Far end high bit error count
: 0
Retrain count
: 3
Near end LOF count
: 0
Far end RFI count
: 0
Far end loss power count
: 0
-------------------------------------------------------Note: the results above depend on the ATU-R's support, and are only for
reference
z
Displaying performance statistics
If you select the parameter performance, the ADSL port performance statistics will be
displayed. You can choose to display performance statistics of the last 15 minutes, last
24 hours, current 24 hours and current performance statistics.
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show statistics
{ stat-type<E><alarm,performance> }:performance
{ PortID<L><0,31> }:6
{ statistics-type<E><last-15minutes,last-24hours,current-24hours,ever-befo
re> }:last-15minutes
1-14

-------------------------------------------------------Far end interleaved CRC error count
: 256
Far end fast CRC error count
: 0
Near end interleaved
: 0
error count
Near end fast CRC error count
: 0
Far end interleaved FEC Error count
: 0
Far end fast FEC Error count
: 0
Near end interleaved FEC Error count
: 0
Near end fast FEC Error count
: 0
Super frame sent
: 19214
Super frame received
: 19214
Time of counting frame at far end
: 23552
Time of counting frame at near end
: 23552
Far end error frames count
: 256
Near end error frames count
: 0
Far end background BE not occur SES
: 256
Near end background BE not occur SES
: 0
Far end error seconds
: 256
Near end error seconds
: 0
Far end severe error seconds
: 0
Near end severe error seconds
: 0
Far end non SES frames
: 19214
Near end non SES frames
: 19214
Far end unavailable seconds
: 0
Near end unavailable seconds
: 0
Near end bit swaps
: 0
Far end loss seconds
: 0
Near end loss seconds
: 0
Far end FEC seconds
: 0
Near end FEC seconds
: 0
--------------------------------------------------------
IV. Displaying line parameters of an activated port

The command show line is used to display line parameters of an activated port. This
command is only valid after the port has been activated. You can input different
parameters to display different information.
z
If you select operation, operation parameters of the activated port will display;
If you select bit-allocation, bit allocation, which means the allocation of line bit
rate over 256 sub-carriers of the activated port will be displayed;
If you select snr, the distribution of signal noise ratio over the 256 sub-carriers will
display.
For example:
1-15

MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#show line
{ line-type<E><operation,bit-allocation,snr> }:operation
{ PortID<L><0,31> }:6
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#
-------------------------------------------------------Channel mode
: Interleaved
: Disable
: Disable
Downstream channel rate(Kbps)
: 6144
Upstream channel rate(Kbps)
: 640
Downstream channel noise margin(dB)
: 20
Upstream channel noise margin(dB)
: 18
Downstream channel attenuation(dB)
: 0.0
Upstream channel attenuation(dB)
: 1.5
Downstream interleaved channel delay(ms)
: 18
Upstream interleaved channel delay(ms)
: 21
Downstream maximum attainable rate(Kbps)
: 7744
Upstream maximum attainable rate(Kbps)
: 992
Total output power transmitted by ATU-C(dBm)
: 8
Trellis Mode
: Enable
Port followed standard G.DMT in training

--------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Configuring SHLA Board

The MA5100 SHLA board provides ATM-based SHDSL access for the users.
Each SHLA provides 32 SHDSL interfaces, supporting SHDSL access rates of 192
kbit/s~2304 kbit/s (2 lines) and 384 kbit/s~4608 kbit/s (4 lines).
The configuration commands are listed in Table 1-2
Table 1-2 Commands for SHLA configuration
Operation
Command
Mode
Adding an SHDSL line profile
shdsl line-profile add
Deleting an SHDSL line profile
shdsl
delete
Displaying an SHDSL profile
show shdsl line-profile
Adding an SHDSL alarm profile
shdsl
add
1-16
line-profile
alarm-profile

Operation
Command
shdsl
delete
Deleting an SHDSL alarm profile

Displaying
an
configuration
SHDSL
profile
Mode
alarm-profile
show
alarm-profile
shdsl

Modifying the alarm profile quoted by a

port
alarm-config
SHL configuration mode
Blocking or unblocking a port
(no)block
Activating an SHDSL port.
activate
Deactivating an SHDSL port
deactivate
Enabling port loopback
loopback
Setting SHDSL port power backoff
power-backoff
Binding/unbinding an SHDSL port
(no) port bind
1.2.1 Configuring SHDSL Line Profile

The SHDSL line profile can be added, deleted and displayed in the global configuration
mode.
I. Adding an SHDSL line profile

The command shdsl line-profile add is used to add an SHDSL line profile.
Note:
The M5100 has a default SHDSL line profile with profile index of 1. By default, this profile is used.
The configuration flow for SHDSL line profile is shown in Figure 1-3.
1-17

Configure SHDSL profile

Set profile index
Y
Basic configuration?
N
4-line SHDSL
Set line interface work mode

2-line SHDSL
Set minimum line rate

Set line rate
Set maximum line rate
Set power spectral density mode
Set transmission mode
Set remote enable
Set probe enable mode
Set SNR margin?
Y
Set SNR margin
End
Figure 1-3 Configuration flow of SHDSL line profile
Procedures for configuring line profile for SHDSL port are as follows.
1)
Select profile index.
MA5100(config)#shdsl line-profile
{ add<K>|delete<K> }:add
{ <cr>|profileIndex<L><2,99> }:
Start adding profile 6
During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored
You can define a profile index or leave it allocated by the system. The profile index will
be used for quoting or deleting this profile.
2)
> Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n
If you choose Y at the above prompt, the default line profile 1 will be quoted for creating
a new profile, and the configuration is completed.
1-18

If you choose N, proceed the following steps to create a new line profile.
3)
Set G.SHDSL interface operation mode.
> G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire)[1]:
There are two G.SHDSL interface modes: 2-wire SHDSL and 4-wire SHDSL mode. The
default mode is 2-wire.
Caution:
ATM-based SHDSL supports both 2-wire and 4-wire SHDSL mode.
4)
Set minimum line rate for 2-wire G.SHDSL.
> G.SHDSL minimum line rate

(Value must be multiple of 64,192~2304 kbps)[2048]:
The line rate for 2-wire G.SHDSL must be multiples of 64 kbit/s. If not, it will be adjusted
to the higher value that is closest to the input one. For example, if you input 280, the line
rate will be adjusted to 320 kbit/s automatically.
ATM-based SHDSL line rate ranges from 192~2304 kbit/s.
5)
Set maximum line rate for 2-wire G.SHDSL.
> G.SHDSL maximum line rate

(Value must be multiple of 64,192~2304 kbps)[2048]:
This step configures the maximum transmission rate for the associated SHDSL line in
bits-per-second in the same way as the above step. If the maximum line rate equals the
minimum line rate, the line rate is considered 'fixed'. If the maximum line rate is larger
than the minimum line rate, the line rate is considered 'rate-adaptive'
6)
Set line rate for 4-wire G.SHDSL.
> G.SHDSL four wire lines rate

(The value should be the multiple of 128,384~4608 kbps)[4096]:
The line rate for 4-wire G.SHDSL must be multiples of 128 kbit/s. If not, it will be
adjusted to the higher value that is closest to the input one.
7)
Set power spectral density mode.
> Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]:
This step configures the symmetric/asymmetric Power Spectral Density (PSD) mode
for the SHDSL Line. The SHDSL line transceiver must support symmetric PSD, while
asymmetric PSD is optional. The default setting is symmetric PSD.
1-19

8)
Set transmission mode.
> Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;

3--support Annex A&B)[2]:
This step sets the transmission mode, which may vary in different regions. The office
end equipment and user end equipment must have the same transmission mode for
SHDSL line.
1 indicates a transmission mode that complies with G.991.2 Annex A, which is mostly
used in North America and Japan.
2 indicates a transmission mode that complies with G.991.2 Annex B, which is mostly
used in Europe. By default, it is G.991.2 Annex B.
3 indicates both G.992.1 Annex A and G.991.2 Annex B are supported.
9)
Set remote enable.
> Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]:
This step enables or disables remote management of units in a SHDSL line from a
STU-R. By default, this function is enabled.
10) Set probe enable.
> Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]:
This step enables/disables support for line probe of the units in a SHDSL line. When
line probe is enabled, the system shall find the best possible rate. If it is disabled, the
system shall skip the line probe process to shorten the time used to set up the
connection. By default, line probe is disabled.
11) Set target SNR margin.
Signal Noise Ratio (SNR) margin is the difference between the desired SNR and the
actual SNR. Target SNR margin is the desired SNR margin.
> Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:y
If you input n, the SHDSL line profile configuration is completed. If you input y, the
following message appears for you to set the downstream target SNR margin:
> Downstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]:0
The default is 0.
You can set the SNR margin as 3 for ordinary users, and set it as 5 for higher priority
users.
> Downstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]:
Set the worst downstream SNR margin; the default is 0.

> Upstream current target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]:
Set current upstream target SNR margin; the default is 0.

1-20

> Upstream worst case target SNR margin(0~10 db)[0]:
Set the worst upstream target SNR margin, the default is 0.

> Target SNR margin bitmap(0x01~0x0f,bit0--down current,bit1-down worst,
bit2--up current,bit3--up worst)[0x01]:
Set the bitmap of target SNR margin, which ranges from 0x01-0x0F.
0x01:
bit3 bit2
bit1 bit0
bit0=1 indicates to enable the current downstream target SNR margin;

bit1=1 indicates to enable the worst downstream target SNR margin;
bit2=1 indicates to enable the current upstream target SNR margin;
bit3=1 indicates to enable the worst upstream target SNR margin;
The default is 0x01, that is to say, the current downstream SNR margin is enabled. At
present, the default must be used.
12) The message that indicates successful setting returns.
When an SHDSL line profile is configured successfully, the system returns a message,
which contains the profile index, which is 6 in this example.
II. Deleting an SHDSL line profile

The command shdsl line-profile delete is used to delete a specific SHDSL line profile.
MA5100(config)#shdsl line-profile delete
{ profileIndex<L><2,99> }:6
Profile 6 already deleted
Note:
The default line profile (with profile index 1) cannot be deleted.
III. Displaying SHDSL line profile

The command show shdsl line-profile is used to display the information of a specific
line profile.
The following example shows how to display the line profile with profile index of 1.
MA5100(config)#show shdsl line-profile
1-21

{ spanProfileId<L><1,99>|all<K> }:1
Command:
show shdsl line-profile 1
---------------------------------------------------------Line profile index
:1
Line profile name
:DEFVAL
G.SHDSL interface mode of line
:two wire
G.SHDSL minimum line rate(unit:kbps)
:2048
G.SHDSL maximum line rate(unit:kbps)
:2048
PSD
:symmetric
Transmission mode
:G.991.2 Annex B
Remote enable
:enabled
Probe
:disabled
Downstream current target SNR margin
:0
Downstream worst target SNR margin
:0
Upstream current target SNR margin
:0
Upstream worst target SNR margin
:0
Target SNR margin used bitmap
:0x1
Reference status
:referenced
----------------------------------------------------------
A line profile which is under the Reference status cannot be deleted.

The following example shows how to display information of all line profiles.
MA5100(config)#show shdsl line-profile all
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Applicable
Index
MinLineRate
Pair
MaxLineRate
(kbps)
(kbps)
TransMode
RefStatus
-------------------------------------------------------------------------1
two wire
2048
2048
G.991.2 Annex B
referenced
two wire
1920
1920
G.991.2 Annex B
referenced
two wire
2048
2048
G.991.2 Annex B
not referenced
two wire
2048
2048
G.991.2 Annex B
not referenced
two wire
2048
2048
G.991.2 Annex B
not referenced
two wire
2048
2048
G.991.2 Annex B
not referenced
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2.2 Configuring SHDSL Alarm Profile

The SHDSL alarm profile can be added, deleted and displayed in the global
configuration mode.
1-22

Note:
The M5100 has a default SHDSL alarm profile with profile index of 1. By default, this profile is used.
I. Adding an SHDSL alarm profile

The command shdsl alarm-profile add is used to add an SHDSL alarm profile.
Start configuring
alarm profile
Specify profile index
Use default data?
N
Set loopback
attenuation threshold
Set SNR threshold
Set errored
second threshold
Set severely
ES threshold
Set CRC threshold
Set LOSW threshold
Set unavailable
second threshold
End
Figure 1-4 Configuration flow for SHDSL alarm profile
Procedures for configuring alarm profile for SHDSL port are as follows.
1)
Set alarm profile index.
MA5100(config)#shdsl alarm-profile add

You can define a profile index or leave it allocated by the system. The profile index will
be used for quoting or deleting this profile.
2)
1-23


Do you use the default data to create an alarm profile?(y/n)[y]:n
If you input y at the above prompt, the default alarm profile 1 will be quoted to create a
new profile. Then the procedures for configuring an alarm profile are completed.
If you input n, proceed the following steps to create a new alarm profile
3)
Set loop attenuation alarm threshold.
Loop attenuation threshold (0~127 db)[0]:
This step configures the loop attenuation alarm threshold. When the loop attenuation
reaches or exceeds this threshold, an alarm will be generated. The default is 0dB,
which means the alarm is disabled.
4)
Set SNR margin threshold.
SNR margin threshold (0~10 db)[0]:
The step sets the alarm threshold for SNR margin. When the margin reaches or drops
below this threshold, an alarm will be generated. The default value is 0dB.
5)
Set other alarm parameters.
This step sets other alarm parameters, including Errored Second (ES), Severely
Errored Second (SES), Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) abnormal, Loss Of Sync
Word Second (LOSWS) and Unavailable Second (UAS). You may set these thresholds
as needed. By default, these parameters are all 0.
ES threshold (0~900 s)[0]:
SES threshold (0~900 s)[0]:
CRC anomaly threshold (0~58981500)[0]:
LOSWS threshold (0~900 s)[0]:
UAS threshold (0~900 s)[0]
6)
The message that indicate successful setting returns.

When an SHDSL alarm profile is configured successfully, the system returns a

message, which contains the profile index, which is 4 in this example.
II. Deleting an SHDSL alarm profile

The command shdsl alarm-profile delete is used to delete a specific SHDSL alarm
profile.
1-24

Note:
The default alarm profile (with profile index 1) cannot be deleted.
MA5100(config)#shdsl alarm-profile delete

{ profileIndex<L><2,99> }:4
Profile 4 already deleted
III. Displaying SHDSL alarm profile

The command show shdsl alarm-profile is used to display the information of a
specific alarm profile.
The following example shows how to display the alarm profile with profile index of 1.
MA5100(config)#show shdsl alarm-profile 1
-----------------------------------------------------------Alarm profile index:1
Alarm profile name:DEFVAL
Loop attenuation threshold (unit:db):0
SNR margin threshold (unit:db):0
ES threshold (unit:second):0
SES threshold (unit:second):0
CRC anomalies number threshold:0
LOSWS threshold (unit:second):0
UAS threshold (unit:second):0
Reference status:referenced
----------------------------------------------------------
An alarm profile which is under the Reference status cannot be deleted.

The following example shows how to display information of all alarm profiles.
MA5100(config)#show shdsl alarm-profile all
-------------------------------------------------------------------Index
LOOPA
SNR Margin
ES
SES
CRC
LOSW
UAS
RefStatus
-------------------------------------------------------------------1
referenced
---------------------------------------------------------------------
IV. Modifying the alarm profile quoted by a port

The command alarm-config is used to change the alarm profile to another one instead
of the default alarm profile.
The following example shows how to change the alarm profile of SHDSL port 0.
1-25

MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#alarm-config
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:0
{ profileIndex<1,99> }:2
Succeed to config CO alarm profile of port 0
The quoted alarm profile is the one that has been added through the command shdsl
alarm-profile add.
1.2.3 Blocking/Unblocking an SHDSL Port

The command (no) block is used to block or unblock an SHDSL port.
The following example shows how to unblock all the SHDSL ports.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#no block
{ portId<L><0,31>|all<K> }:all
Port 0 unblock successfully

The following example shows how to block SHDSL port 2.

MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#block
{ portId<L><0,31>|all<K> }:2
Port 2 block successfully
1.2.4 Activating/Deactivating an SHDSL Port

Only an active SHDSL port can transmit services. Activation of an SHDSL port refers to
the training between the SHDSL CO and the SHDSL CPE. During the training process,
the line distance and line status will be checked based on profile parameters, such as
the SHDSL standards, line rate, power spectral density mode and transmission mode.
The SHDSL CO and the SHDSL CPE negotiate to confirm that the MA5100 can work
normally in the aforementioned conditions. If training is successful, communication
links will be established between SHDSL CO and SHDSL CPE, and service transfer is
ready to begin. This is the process to activate an SHDSL port. For an online CPE, the
activation process ends right after the negotiation between the CO and CPE is
completed successfully. When the CPE gets offline, the communication links
disconnect, and the CO is in listening state. Once the CPE gets online, the training
process begins automatically to activate the port.
Conditions for activating a port vary with different ports.
1-26

The command activate is used to activate an SHDSL port, while the command
activate all is used to activate all the SHDSL ports in one time. If you do not quote the
line profile, the current line profile will be used to activate the port.
The following example shows how to activate SHDSL port 0 by using line profile 2.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#activate
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:0
{ <cr>|profileIndex<1,99> }:2
Port 0 activation command has been sent successfully
The command deactivate is used to deactivate an SHDSL port. A deactivated port

must be activated before service can be transmitted over the port.
Note:
z
The rate of SHLA port must be in the range of 192~2312 kbit/s before the port can be activated.
Only the port that is in Deactive state can be activated.
In initial state, the default SHDSL profile (with profile index of 1) is used to activate all ADSL ports.
When you modify the line profile for the port, first deactivate the port, and then activate the port by
using the desired line profile.
1.2.5 Binding/Unbinding SHDSL Ports

The command (no) port bind is used to bind or unbind two adjacent ports (2N and
2N+1) on an SHLA board to enable or disable the 4-line G.SHDSL function.
Note:
z
The ports to be bound must be in the deactive state, and no PVC shall exist on such ports.
After the ports are bound, all operations are made on the primary port.
The bound ports must be activated by using 4-line SHDSL line profile.
Before the bound ports can be unbound, they must be deactivated, and PVCs on the ports must be
deleted.
1.2.6 Enabling/Disabling SHDSL Port Loopback

The command (no) loopback is used to enable or disable the loopback of an SHDSL
port.
1-27

The following example shows how to enable local loopback for SHDSL port 0.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#loopback
{ portId<0,31> }:0
{ local<K>|remote<K> }:local
Local loopback of port 0 succeeds, it will take effect after port is activated
The following example shows how to disable the loopback of port 0.

MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#no loopback
{ portId<0,31> }:0
Stop local loopback of port 0 offline successfully
Note:
z
Local loopback is only valid when the port is deactivated.
Remote loopback is only valid when the port is activated. If the line training is unsuccessful, the remote
loopback will take effect after the training is successful.
Remote loopback is not supported on bound ports.
All the loopback functions will get lost after the board or the system restarts. You have to configure it
again if you need the function.
1.2.7 Configuring Power Backoff for an SHDSL Port

The command power-backoff can only be used on a deactivated port.
The following example shows how to configure power backoff for SHDSL port 1.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#power-backoff
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:1
{ powerbackoffType<E><default,enhanced> }:default
Succeed to config power backoff mode of port 1
1.2.8 Commands for Querying SHDSL Port Information

I. Querying SHDSL port inventory
The command show inventory is used to display the information about the Modem on
the office end.
The following example shows how to display the inventory information of SHDSL port 0.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#show inventory
{ portId<0,31> }:0
-------------------------------------------------Inventory of SHDSL local port 0
1-28

Vendor ID
:HWMA5100
Vendor mode
:MASHLA
Vendor serial
:000000000
EOC version
:0
Standard version
:0
Vendor list
:HW
Vendor issue
Software code
:V2R001
Equipment code
:00000000
Information of other verdor
:0
Transmission mode capability :G.991.2 Annex B

--------------------------------------------------
II. Querying SHDSL port status

The command show port state is used to display the configuration information and
running state of the SHDSL port you have configured.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#show port state
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:0
-------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running
Control
Line
ID
State
Profile Profile Operation
State
Alarm
Running
Config
Bind
Operation
State
-------------------------------------------------------------------0
activating
Active
2 Normal
None
Normal
--------------------------------------------------------------------
III. Querying SHDSL port performance

The command show statistics performance is used to display the current and history
performance statistics.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#show statistics
{ performance<K> }:performance
{ portId<0,31> }:0
{ current<K>|historic-15minutes<K>|historic-24hours<K> }:current
-------------------------------------------------Local current state
Current LoopAttenuation (unit:db)
:0
Current SNR margin(unit:db)
:0
Total seconds counted in 15 minutes
:734
ES count in 15 minutes (unit:Second)
:0
SES count in 15 minutes (unit:Second)
:0
CRC anomaly count in 15 minutes
:0
LOSW count in 15 minutes (unit:Second) :0
1-29

UAS count in 15 minutes (unit:Second)
:734
Total seconds counted in 24 hours
:2534
ES count in 24 hours (unit:Second)
:0
SES count in 24 hours (unit:Second)
:0
CRC anomaly count in 24 hours
:0
LOSW count in 24 hours (unit:Second)
:0
UAS count in 24 hours (unit:Second)
:2534
--------------------------------------------------
1-30

Chapter 2 Configuring ATM-DSLAM Service

2.1 Introduction to ATMDSLAM Service
ATM-DSLAM is one of the typical applications of the MA5100, in which the MA5100
provides SOHO and VOD applications through its xDSL functions. Figure 2-1 shows
the ATM-DSLAM networking of the MA5100.
ATM
MA5100
A
D
L
E
M
M
X
C
S
H
L
A
ATU-R
STU-R
Phone
PC
PC
Figure 2-1 ATM-DSLAM networking of the MA5100

In the figure, the service data streams on the xDSL ports of the MA5100 are converged
to the MMXC board through the PVCs, multiplexed by the MMXC and then sent to the
ATM switch through the ATM interface on the MA5100. The MMXC implements flow
control and shaping on the service streams to guarantee the QoS.
In ATM-DSLAM service, there are two methods to control the access rate of an xDSL
access user.
z
Limiting the rate on the port, which is implemented through the xDSL line profile;
For an ADSL port, this is a very common method for rate control, in which the maximum
line rate has been set for both the upstream and downstream traffic in the ADSL line
profile.
For an SHDSL port, the maximum SHDSL line rate is configured in the line profile, while
the upstream and downstream rates are the same.
2-1

z
Limiting the rate through PVC
In this method, different flow control parameters are configured according to the
demands on access rate, in which the receiving flow control parameter rx-cttr and the
sending flow control parameter tx-cttr are configured and quoted with the table items in
the flow control table.
These two methods are described in the following examples.
2.2 Configuring PVC for xDSL-ATM Service

2.2.1 Configuring PVC for ADSL-ATM Service
ADSL-ATM is one of the typical services of the MA5100, while the establishment of
PVC between the ADSL port and the ATM port (both optical and electrical) on the
MMXC/AIU boards is a very important process in the configuration.
The following takes the configuration of PVC between the ADSL port and the ATM port
on the MMXC as an example to illustrate the process of establishing PVC for
ADSL-ATM service.
1)
Input the frame number, slot number and port number for the ADSL board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
2)
The vpi/vci must be consistent with that of the ADSL Modem connected with the ADSL
board. The default values are 0/35.
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
3)
The ATM port number on the MMXC ranges from 8-11.

{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K> }:atm
4)
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
2-2

{ vci<32,65535> }:40
The vpi, vci you input here refer to those correspond to the ATM switch side, which is
planned by yourself globally.
5)
Specify the connection type.
There are four types of connections: p2p, p2mp, group, and group_p2p. Only p2p can
be selected here.
6)
The default TIDs are recommended. If the default TIDs cannot satisfy the demand,
create new TID by yourself according to the descriptions given in Basic Configurations.
Generally, UBR is selected for ADSL services, which quotes TID 2.
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
7)
PVC index number returns.
After the configuration, a PVC index number (CID) returns. A CID exclusively identifies
a PVC, and is the basis for further operations on the PVC.
2.2.2 Configuring PVC for SHDSL-ATM Service

Similar to ADSL-ATM service, the MA5100 supports PVCs between the SHDSL port
and the ATM port (both optical and electrical) on the ATM/AIU boards.
The following takes the configuration of PVC between the SHDSL port and the ATM
port on the MMXC as an example to illustrate the process of establishing PVC for
SHDSL-ATM service.
1)
Input the frame number, slot number and port number for the SHLA board.
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:shdsl
2-3

2)
The vpi/vci must be consistent with that of the SHDSL Modem connected with the
SHLA board. The default values are 0/35.
{ region<K>|vpi<K>|shdsl<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|ad
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ shdsl<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|adsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
3)
{ shdsl<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|adsl<K> }:atm
4)
The vpi, vci you input here refer to those correspond to the ATM switch side, which is
planned by yourself globally.
{ rx-cttr<K>|vpi<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ rx-cttr<K>|vci<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
5)
The traffic parameter is configured according to actual situation. In this example, the
default traffic table is quoted, with TID=2.
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
2-4

2.3 Configuration Example of xDSL-ATM Service

2.3.1 ADSL Configuration Example Rate Restriction on Port
I. Networking diagram
ISN 8850
ATM
MA5100 7#
VPI : 1 VCI : 100

14#
M
M
X
A
D
S
L
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
ATU-R
Phone
PC
Figure 2-2 Networking for ATM-DSLAM service (ADSL)

In the networking diagram:
z
The user is bridged to port 0 of the ADSL board through the ADSL Modem. The
desired downstream bandwidth is 1024 kbit/s, while the upstream bandwidth is
512 kbit/s.
The MMXC board connects through its optical interface to the superior ATM switch
ISN8850.
The ADSL user is able to access the Internet through a PVC in ADSL-ATM mode.
II. Configuring ADSL line profile

The ADSL line profile is configured by restricting the maximum rate at 1024 kbit/s
downstream and 512 kbit/s upstream on the port.
Start adding profile
Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be
neglected
>
Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:
>
Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]:
2-5

>
0-manual 1-auto(0~1) [0]:
>
>
Will you set interleaved depth? (y/n)[n]:y
>
Max. downstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128) [8]: 16
>
Max. upstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128) [8]:
>
Will you set noise margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:
>
Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y
If you want the fixed rate, set the Min. value equal to Max. value
>
Min. bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]:
>
Max. bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]: 1024
>
Min. bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [32]:
>
Max. bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]: 512

III. Entering the ADSL interface configuration mode

MA5100(config)#interface adsl 0/14
IV. Deactivating port 0 on the ADSL board

The ADSL ports are activated by default, so you need to deactivate the port before
changing the line profile that is quoted by the port.
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#deactivate
{ portid<L><0,31>|all<K> }:0
Deactivate port 0 successfully
V. Activating port 0 using the new line profile

The following shows how to activate port 0 by using line profile 5.
MA5100(config-if-adsl-0/14)#activate
{ PortID<L><0,31>|all<K> }:0
{ <cr>|profile-index<L><1,99> }:5
Send the command to activate port
0 successfully.
VI. Establishing connection between ADSL port 0 and MMXC optical port
Select UBR for ADSL service, quote TID 2 directly, and turn off the UPC switch:
MA5100(config)#pvc
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
2-6

{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ upc<E><off,on> }:off
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
Create PVC successfully! Connection ID = 0
VII. Saving the configuration

MA5100#save
2.3.2 ADSL Configuration Example Rate Restriction on PVC

Refer to 2.3.2 for the networking and requirements.
I. Configuring ADSL line profile

When restricting the rate on PVC, the default line profile can be used, and there is no
need to activate the ADSL port by yourself.
II. Adding upstream traffic table item

Add an upstream traffic table item (TID=5). The service category is rt-vbr, and
maximum upstream rate is 512 kbit/s.
{ ubr<K>|cbr<K>|rt-vbr<K>|nrt-vbr<K> }:rt-vbr
{ ClpTransparentScr<K>|NoClpScrCdvt<K>|ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt<K>|ClpTaggingSc
rCdvt<K> }:clptaggingScrCdvt
2-7

{ pcrval<1,599039> }:800
{ Clp0Scr<K> }:clp0Scr
{ scrval<1,599039> }:512
{ Mbs<K> }:mbs
{ mbsval<1,2000> }:500
{ Cdvt<K> }:cdvt
{ cdvtval<10,26738680> }:500
{ <cr>|EnPPDisc<K>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:enpPDisc
{ EnPPDisc<E><off,on> }:on
{ <cr>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:enePDisc
{ EnEPDisc<E><off,on> }:on
{ <cr>|EnShape<K> }:

------------------------------------------------------TD Table
TID
TDType
: 5
: ClpTaggingScrCdvt
Service category : rt-vbr

UsedCount
: 0
EnPPDISC
: on
EnEPDISC
: on
Traffic Shape
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 800 kbps
Clp0Scr
: 512 kbps
Mbs
: 500 cells
CDVT
: 500 tenth_us
--------------------------------------------------------
III. Adding downstream traffic table item

Add the downstream traffic table item (TID=6). The service category is rt-vbr, and the
maximum downstream rate is 1024 kbit/s.
{ ubr<K>|cbr<K>|rt-vbr<K>|nrt-vbr<K> }:rt-vbr
rCdvt<K> }:clptaggingScrCdvt
{ pcrval<1,599039> }:3000
{ scrval<1,599039> }:1024
2-8

{ Mbs<K> }:mbs
{ mbsval<1,2000> }:800
{ Cdvt<K> }:cdvt
{ cdvtval<10,26738680> }:800
{ <cr>|EnPPDisc<K>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:enpPDisc
{ EnPPDisc<E><off,on> }:on
{ <cr>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:enePDisc
{ EnEPDisc<E><off,on> }:on
{ <cr>|EnShape<K> }:

-----------------------------------------------------TD Table
TID
: 6
TDType
: ClpTaggingScrCdvt

UsedCount
: 0
EnPPDISC
: on
EnEPDISC
: on
Traffic Shape
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 3000 kbps
Clp0Scr
: 1024 kbps
Mbs
: 800 cells
CDVT
: 800 tenth_us
IV. Establishing PVC between ADSL port 0 and MMXC optical port
MA5100(config)#pvc
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
2-9

{ index<0,511> }:6
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:5
{ upc<K> }:upc
V. Saving the configuration

MA5100#save
2.3.3 SHDSL Configuration Example

Like in the ADSL service, rate restriction can also be implemented on the port and PVC
in SHDSL service.
The configuration of the SHDSL service is basically the same with that of the ADSL
service. The following is an example to configure rate restriction on the port for SHDSL
service.
ISN 8850
ATM
MA5100 7#
VPI : 1 VCI : 100

14#
M
M
X
S
H
L
A
VPI : 0 VCI : 35
STU-R
PC
Figure 2-3 Networking for ATM-DSLAM service (SHDSL)

2-10

z
The user is connected to port 0 of the SHLA board through the SHDSL Modem.
The desired bandwidth is 1920 kbit/s.
The MMXC board connects through its optical interface to the superior ATM switch
ISN8850.
The SHDSL user is able to access the Internet through a PVC in SHDSL-ATM
mode.
II. Configuring SHDSL line profile

The SHDSL line profile is configured by restricting the maximum rate at 1920 kbit/s on
the port.
MA5100(config)#shdsl line-profile add

> Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n
> G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire)[1]:
> G.SHDSL minimum line rate
(Value must be multiple of 64,192~2304 kbps)[2048]:1920
> G.SHDSL maximum line rate
(Value must be multiple of 64,192~2304 kbps)[2048]:1920
> Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]:
> Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B;
3--support Annex A&B)[2]:
> Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]:
> Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]:
> Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]:
III. Entering the SHDSL interface configuration mode

MA5100(config)#interface shl 0/14
IV. Deactivating SHDSL port 0

The SHDSL ports are activated by default, so you need to deactivate the port before
changing the line profile that is quoted by the port.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#deactivate
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:0
Succeed to deactive port 0
2-11

V. Activating port 0 using the new line profile

The following shows how to activate port 0 by using line profile 2.
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#activate
{ portId<0,31>|all<K> }:0
{ <cr>|profileIndex<1,99> }:2
Port 0 activation command has been sent successfully.
After the configuration, you can display the status of the SHDSL port. For example:
MA5100(config-if-shl-0/3)#show port state 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------Port Running
Control
Line
Alarm
Running
Config
Bind
ID
Status
Profile
Profile
Operation
Operation
Status
Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------0
Activated
Active
Normal
None
Normal
--------------------------------------------------------------------
VI. Establishing connection between SHDSL port 0 and MMXC optical port
Select UBR for SHDSL service, quote TID 2 directly, and turn off the UPC switch:
MA5100(config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:shdsl
{ region<K>|vpi<K>|shdsl<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|ad
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ shdsl<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|adsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ shdsl<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|adsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
2-12


MA5100#save
2-13

Chapter 3 Configuring LAN Board

The MA5100 is able to implement LAN dedicated line interconnection, IP-DSLAM,
ATM-DSLAM applications and video multicast services through its LAN board. The
configuration and management of the LAN board are introduced in this chapter, while
the related service applications are introduced in the following chapters.
3.1 Introduction to LAN Board

LAN board (LAND) provides different types of interfaces and services.
Table 3-1 lists the types of interfaces supported by the LAND board when it is attached
with different subboards.
Table 3-1 Interfaces and functions provided by the LAND board
Subboard
Interface
H511O1GTA
1GE multi-mode optical port (LC/PC), 500m, for IP uplink only
H511O1GTF
1GE single mode optical port (LC/PC), 10km, for IP uplink only
H511O1GTH
1GE single mode optical port (LC/PC), 70km, for IP uplink only
H511O1FSB
1x 100M Ethernet multi-mode optical port (LC/PC), 2km, for LAN dedicated line or IP
uplink
H511O1FSF
1x 100M Ethernet single mode optical port (LC/PC), 2km, for LAN dedicated line or
IP uplink
H511O1FSG
1x 100M Ethernet single mode optical port (LC/PC),40km, for LAN dedicated line or
IP uplink
H511O2FSB
2x 100M Ethernet multi-mode optical ports (LC/PC), 2km, for LAN dedicated line or
IP uplink
H511O2FSF
IP uplink
H511O2FSG
IP uplink
H511O4FSB
4100M Ethernet multi-mode optical ports (LC/PC), 2km, for LAN dedicated line or
IP uplink
H511O4FSF
4100M Ethernet single mode optical port (LC/PC), 15km, for LAN dedicated line or
IP uplink
H511O4FSG
IP uplink
3-1

Subboard
Interface
H511O8FSB
8100M Ethernet multi-mode optical port (LC/PC), 2km, for LAN dedicated line or IP
uplink
H511O8FSF
IP uplink
H511O8FSG
IP uplink
H511E8FS
810M/100M Ethernet electrical port, for LAN dedicated line or IP uplink
The LAND supports LAN dedicated line access, LAN interconnection over ATM, as well
as IP uplink for IP-DSLAM applications. It also supports IGMP Snooping function for
video multicast service. When LAND is used for ATM-DSLAM, it does not provide
interface.
The same LAND cannot provide LAN dedicated line access, IP-DSLAM, and
ATM-DSLAM applications at the same time.
The following takes the configuration of LAND as an example, in which the attached
subboard provides 810M/100M Ethernet electrical ports.
3.2 Configuring the LAN Board

The configuration of LAND includes these procedures:
1)
Configuring LAND operation mode
2)
Configuring LAND port operation mode
3)
Adding/deleting VLAN
4)
Defining default VLAN for LAND port
5)
Displaying VLAN configuration of LAND
The configuration commands are listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Commands for LAND configuration
Operation
Command
Mode
Enabling or disabling Ethernet interface
(no)shutdown
LAN configuration mode
Configuring LAND operation mode
operation mode
Displaying LAND operation mode
show operation-mode
Configuring LAND port operation mode
port mode
Adding a VLAN to LAND
vlan add
Displaying all VLANs of LAND
show vlan
Displaying region VLAN of LAND
show region-vlan
3-2

Operation
Command
Mode
Defining default VLAN of LAND
default-vlanid
Defining max MAC address learning of

PVC
max-mac-count
Displaying max MAC address learning of

PVC
show max-mac-count
Displaying the MAC addresses that have

been learnt
show mac-count
Enabling/disabling CAR
(no) car
Displaying CAR
show pvc car
Configuring 802.1p priority
(no) priority
LAN board configuration

mode
Displaying 802.1p priority
show priority

mode
Configuring GMII interface frame switch
gmii-pause

mode
Configuring traffic suppress
traffic-suppress

mode
Configuring VLAN mask
vlan mask

mode
Deleting a VLAN
vlan delete

mode
Displaying traffic suppress
show traffic-suppress
Adding/deleting a Trunk group
(no)trunk
Configuring Trunk mode
trunk-mode
3.2.1 Changing the Operation Mode of LAND

I. Operation modes of LAND
Currently, the LAND board supports three operation modes (GENERAL, IPDSLAM
and ATM-GROUP) for different networks and applications, as shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 Difference between LAND operation modes
Mode
Applications
GENERAL
For ATM-DSLAM networking, supports LAN dedicated line interconnection
IPDSLAM
For IP-DSLAM networking, supports xDSL Internet access and multicast

services
3-3

Mode
ATM-GROUP
Applications
For ATM-DSLAM networking, supports xDSL access and multicast services
Table 3-4 lists the different features of the operation modes.

Table 3-4 Difference in features of the operation modes
No. of supported normal
VLAN
No. of supported
region VLAN
No. of supported logic

VLAN
GENERAL
32
Not supported
Not supported
IPDSLAM
Not supported
60
4k
ATM-GROUP
Not supported
60
2k
Mode
In the IP-DSLAM or ATM-GROUP mode, when one PVC on the LAND board
corresponds to one VLAN, this VLAN is called logical VLAN.
The command show operation-mode is used to display current operation mode of the
LAND board:
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#show operation-mode
LAN board operation mode: GENERAL
When no subboard is attached, the default mode of LAND is ATM-GROUP, otherwise, it

is GENERAL.
II. Changing the operation mode

The command operation-mode is used to change the current operation mode to
another. For example:
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#operation-mode
{ mode<E><general,ipdslam,atm-group> }:ipdslam
Please delete all LAN access PVC of current board before switching operation
mode
Are you sure to switch operation mode and reset current board?(y/n)[n]:y.
III. Cautions when changing the operation modes

z
When IPDSLAM or ATM-GROUP is changed to GENERAL, all the PVCs and

region VLANs must be deleted manually first;
When GENERAL is changed to IPDSLAM or ATM-GROUP, all dedicated line

PVCs must be deleted manually first, and the VLANs will be deleted automatically;
When the LAND board works in ATM-GROUP mode, the service data stream is
sent to the MMXC through the LAND board, and the MMXC provides uplink ports.
3-4

So in ATM-GROUP mode, LAND does not need to provide external interface,

which means no interface subboard is required;
z
Before ATM-GROUP is changed to another mode, the corresponding subboard

must be configured.
3.2.2 Configuring LAND Port

I. Enabling/disabling the LAND port
The command (no)shutdown is used to enable or disable the ports on the subboard
attached to the LAND. By default, the LAND port is enabled.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#no shutdown
{ port<0,7> }:0
Activate LAN Port 0 successfully
II. Configuring LAND port mode

The command port mode is used to configure the port mode. Figure 3-1 shows the
configuration steps.
Set LAN port mode
general
LAN work mode
Support VLAN
tagged/untagged?
ipdslam
Select negotiation
mode
negotiate
non-negotiate
negotiate
Support full-duplex/half
duplex?
Select negotiation
mode
non-negotiate
Line-self-adaptive
Support full-duplex/half
duplex?
Transmission rate
10/100/1000M
Support pause frame?
Transmission rate
10/100/1000M
Support pause frame?
End
Figure 3-1 Flow of configuring LAN port mode
3-5
Line-self-adaptive

1)
Set LAND port mode.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#port mode
{ portId<0,7>|all<K> }:0
{ general<K>|ipdslam<K> }:general
Two modes are available: GENERAL and IPDSLAM. When the board works under
ATM-GROUP, no subboard is needed, so you do not need to set the port mode.
2)
Whether to support tagged VLAN
{ tagged<E><tagged,untagged> }:tagged
tagged indicates to support VLAN cascade, and untagged indicates not to support
VLAN cascade.
In general, when a LAND port is connected with an ordinary network interface card or a
HUB, the port can be configured as either untagged or tagged mode. When the port is
connected with a LAN Switch, it must be configured as tagged. By default, it works in
tagged mode.
z
When a port that works in tagged mode receives data, default VLAN ID will be
added to a packet that does not contain a VLAN ID. When a port works in
untagged mode, all data packets will be added with the default VLAN ID.
When a port that works in tagged mode transmits data, VLAN ID of a packet will be
dropped if it is the same as the default VLAN ID. If a VLAN ID is different from the
default one, it will not be dropped, but be transmitted transparently. However,
when this port works in untagged mode, VLAN ID of a packet will be dropped in
any case.
Note:
In IPDSLAM mode, general principles for tagged/untagged VLAN are not supported.
3)
Select negotiation mode
{negotiate, non-negotiate}: negotiate
It is time-consuming to make manual configurations with each terminal. The port

negotiation function provides a solution to this problem.
Negotiation enables the devices at both ends of the physical link to exchange
information and determine a common operation mode. Contents to be negotiated
include duplex mode, rate and flow control.
negotiate indicates to configure the port mode automatically, non-negotiate indicates
to configure the port mode manually. By default, the port mode is negotiate. The LAN
ports are generally configured as negotiate unless specially required or the remote
device does not support it.
3-6

Note:
The interconnected interfaces must be configured consistently, for example, never configure one end
as negotiate, and the other end as full duplex.

If one device does not support negotiate, select non-negotiate to configure the port working
parameters manually.
4)
Enable line adaptive
{ <cr>|line-selfadaptive<K> }:
<line-selfadaptive>{on,off}[off]:on
Set port work parameters successfully
The command line-selfadaptive enables or disables the line adaptive function. The
LAND board is able to identify between straight-through cable and cross over cable
when the line adaptive function is enabled.
Note:
z
By default, the line adaptive function is disabled.
Only a port working in negotiate mode supports the line adaptive function. When a port works in
non-negotiate mode, the line adaptive function is disabled automatically.
When the function is enabled or disabled, the port will be offline temporarily, which is normal.
Optical interfaces do not support the line adaptive function.
If you enable the negotiate mode for the port, there is no need to set the parameters
such as full-duplex/half-duplex, rate and PAUSE support. The configuration on the port
mode is finished here.
If you select non-negotiate mode for the port, the following procedures are necessary.
5)
Enable full-duplex or half-duplex
{ negotiate<K>|non-negotiate<K> }:non-negotiate
{ half-duplex<K>|full-duplex<K> }: half-duplex
Full duplex means that data can be received and transmitted simultaneously while
half-duplex means that either data receiving or transmitting is allowed at one time.
6)
Set the transmission rate
{ speed<E><10M,100M,1000M> }:100m
3-7

Note:
The rate for optical interface can only be 100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s.
When a port is set to work in non-negotiate mode, the line adaptive function will be
disabled automatically.
If you select half-duplex, the configuration on the port mode is finished here. If you
select full-duplex, the following procedure is necessary.
7)
Whether to support pause frame
{ negotiate<K>|non-negotiate<K> }:non-negotiate
{ half-duplex<K>|full-duplex<K> }:full-duplex
{ speed<E><10M,100M,1000M> }:100m
{ pause-frame<E><pause-frame,non-pause-frame> }:pause-frame
III. Adding a VLAN

Proper deploying of VLAN helps to suppress broadcast packets, and improve the
network security.
The command vlan add is used to add an ordinary VLAN or a region VLAN. The LAND
board supports different types of VLANs in different operation modes, as shown in
Table 3-5.
Table 3-5 Configuration of VLAN on LAND
Mode
Normal VLAN
Region VLAN
General
Yes
No
IPDSLAM
No
Yes
ATM-GROUP
No
Yes
The difference between a normal VLAN and a region VLAN is that a normal VLAN
corresponds to one PVC, while a region VLAN is able to converge multiple PVCs.
IV. Setting a normal VLAN in GENERAL mode

MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#vlan
{ add<K>|delete<K>|mask<K> }:add
{ vlanId<1,4095> }:1
{ general<K>|region<K> }:general
{ VlanMask<H><0x1 , 0xff> }:0x7
Add VLAN successfully.
3-8

Note:
z
The eight ports of the LAN board correspond to one octet binary data. Port numbers 0-7 correspond to
bits 0-7 of the octet. Port number 1 indicates that the port belongs to the VLAN. The VLAN mask is a
hexadecimal, for example, VLAN mask 0x11 indicates ports 0 and 4 belong to the VLAN.
VLAN mask for the 1-channel optical interface subboard can only be 0x01.
V. Setting region VLAN in IPDSLAM or ATM-GROUP mode

When region VLAN is set in IPDSLAM or ATM-GROUP mode, VLAN mask is not
needed. This is because all the eight Ethernet ports of the LAND are interconnected in
the IPDSLAM mode, and any one of them can be selected for IPDSLAM uplink.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#vlan add 1
{ general<K>|region<K> }:region
{ vpi<0,127> }:0
{ vci<32,127> }:35
Add region VLAN successfully, VLAN ID is 1.
Note:
When region VLAN is set, its VPI and VCI values must be identical with those at the RTU (ADSL Modem)
side. Usually, VPI/VCI values are set as 0/35.
VI. Deleting a VLAN

The command vlan delete is used to delete a VLAN.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#vlan delete
{ vlanID<1,4095> }:1
Delete region VLAN successfully, VLAN ID is 1
VII. Modifying VLAN mask in GENERAL mode

In GENERAL mode, the command vlan mask is used to add or remove a port into or
from a VLAN.
For example, the VLAN with VLAN ID as 1 contains ports 0 and 4 (VLAN mask is 0x11).
To add port 1 into the VLAN, you can set the VLAN mask as 0x13.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#vlan mask
3-9

{ vlanId<L><1,4095> }:1
{ VlanMask<H><0x1 , 0xff> }:0x13
Modify VLAN mask successfully
VIII. Setting default VLAN

The command default-vlanid is used to set default VLAN.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#default-vlanId
{ vlanId<1,4095> }:2
Set default VLAN for port 0 successfully.
Note:
z
The LAND board must work in GENERAL mode if you set the default VLAN for the port. The default
VLAN of all the ports is 1.
If the LAND port is connected to a PC, HUB or a LAN Switch that has no VLAN division, the default
VLAN must be identical with the VLAN ID that is used by the PVC.
If a LAND port is subtended with a LAN Switch where various VLAN services are configured, the
default VLAN should be different from the VLAN ID. It is recommended to set the default VLAN larger
than 64, and this number cannot be used for a new VLAN ID any more.
The command show port state is used to view the default VLAN information.
3.2.3 Enabling/Disabling Loopback of LAND

You can use the command (no) loopback to enable or disable the loopback function of
the LAND board to help locate the fault in case there is a failure.
LAND provides three loopback modes: port loopback, Gigabit Media Independent
Interface (GMII) loopback and Universal Test & Operations PHY Interface for ATM
(UTOPIA) loopback.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#loopback
{ utopia<K>|gmii<K>|port<K> }:port
{ portid<0,7> }:0
Loopback setting may impact on the running services on current board, are
you sure to continue the operation?(y/n)[n]:y
Set PORT loopback of port 0 successfully.
3-10

3.2.4 Setting LAND Port Mirror

I. Setting the mirror
The mirror function on the LAND board is based on port, which means you can
duplicate the data of one or multiple ports to a designated port for analysis or monitor
purpose.
The command mirror port is used to enable the mirror function.
The following example shows how to mirror the data of ports 0 and 1 to port 2:
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#mirror port
{ src-port-mask<H><0x1 , 0xff> }:0x3
{ mirror-portid<0,7> }:2
Set mirror successfully
src-port-mask indicates the mask of the source port for the mirror. LAND allows mirror
from multiple source ports to one destination port. The rules for setting the mask here
are the same with those for setting a VLAN mask.
Note:
z
The mask of source port cannot contain the destination port number of the mirror.
The number of port masks should match the number of ports on the board.
The 1-port interface subboards do not support the mirror function.
II. Displaying mirror information

The command show mirror is used to display the mirror information.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#show mirror
-------------------------------Source port --> Destination port
-------------------------------0
3-11

--------------------------------
III. Canceling the mirror

The command no mirror port is used to cancel the mirror function.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#no mirror port
Cancel mirror successfully
3.2.5 Setting Maximum Learning of MAC Address for PVC

To restrict the number of users to be connected on a specific xDSL port, you can use
the command max-mac-count to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that
can be learnt by the PVC between the xDSL port and the region VLAN.
Note:
z
The command max-mac-count is only effective for the PVC between the xDSL port and the region
VLAN.
By default, one PVC is able to learn a maximum of 256 MAC addresses.
MA5100(config)#max-mac-count
{ connectid<0,8191> }:5
{ count<1,4095> }:200
If the the maximum MAC address of the connection less than it have learned,
some users that using this connection will be affected, are you sure? (y/n)[n]:
y
Set the maximum MAC address successfully.
When the maximum number of MAC addresses to be learnt is set, if the number of
already-learnt MAC addresses has exceeded the set number, an alarm will be
reported.
The command show max-mac-count is used to query the maximum number of MAC
addresses that can be learnt by a PVC.
MA5100(config)#show max-mac-count 5
-------------------------------------CID
Learnable MAC number
-------------------------------------5
200
The command show mac-count is used to query the number of MAC addresses that
have been learnt by a PVC.
3-12

MA5100(config)#show mac-count
{ connectid<0,8191> }:5
-----------------------------------CID
Learned MAC count
-----------------------------------5
3.2.6 Setting CAR

Committed Access Rate (CAR) refers to the agreed transmission rate of data at the
LAND side. Through the setting of CAR, LAND is able to provide traffic control function.
You can enable or disable CAR while a PVC is being established, or after the PVC has
been established, by using the command (no) car.
The following example shows how to enable the CAR for PVC (CID=5):
MA5100(config)#car
{ cid<K> }:cid
{ cid<0,8191> }:5
{ direction<E><src,dst> }:dst
Set CAR parameter successfully
Note:
z
The command car is only valid for the PVC between the xDSL port and the LAND.
car is a command that aims at the LAND board. So when you select the direction (src, dst), be clear
whether the LAND is the source or destination of the PVC. If the LAND board is the source end of the
PVC, select src; otherwise, select dst.
The following example shows how to disable the CAR function of PVC (CID=5), and
display the CAR setting:
MA5100(config)#no car
{ cid<K> }:cid
{ cid<0,8191> }:5
{ direction<E><src,dst> }:dst
Cancel CAR setting successfully
MA5100(config)#show pvc car
{ vlan<K>|cid<K> }:cid
{ cid<0,8191> }:5
----------------------------------------------------
3-13

CID
Src
Dest
Src car index
Dest car index
---------------------------------------------------5
--
OFF
---------------------------------------------------Total: 1
3.2.7 Configuring the 802.1p Priority Function

When a block occurs, LAND supports the Ethernet frame dispatch based on 802.1p
priority to guarantee the QoS of IP service.
I. Enable and configure the 802.1p priority function for LAND board
802.1p priority configuration includes the priority threshold and the high/low priority
polling ratio.
802.1p priorities have eight types 0-7. In the case of a block, if 802.1p priority of
Ethernet frame is higher than or equal to the priority threshold (The value range is 0-6),
the Ethernet frame will rank among the high priorities. Otherwise, it will rank among the
low priorities. The priority for LAND board is scheduled based on the high/low priority
polling ratio.
The following example shows how to enable the 802.1p priority function, and configure
the priority threshold as 4 and the high/low priority polling ratio as 5:1.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/10)#priority
{ level<K> }:level
{ level<0,6> }:4
{ low-ratio<K> }:low-ratio
{ ratio<0,15> }:1
{ high-ratio<K> }:high-ratio
{ ratio<0,15> }:5
Note: This operation will set GMII pause frame switch at the same time
Set 802.1p priority successfully
Open GMII pause frame switch successfully
II. Query the 802.1p priority for LAND board

MA5100(config-if-lan-0/10)#show priority
802.1p priority switch status
: On
802.1p priority level
802.1p low priority ratio
802.1p high priority ratio
GMII pause frame switch status : On
3-14

III. Disable 802. 1p priority

The command no priority is used to disable the 802. 1p priority function.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/10)#no priority
Cancel 802.1p priority successfully
Close GMII pause frame switch successfully
IV. Configure GMII frame switch

MA5100(config-if-lan-0/10)#gmii-pause
{ on<K>|off<K> }:on
The GMII pause switch is opened or closed with the enabling/disabling of 802.1p
priority function, thus it is not necessary to set the GMII pause switch separately.
3.2.8 Setting Traffic Suppression for Broadcast/Multicast/Unknown Uicast

The LAND board provides suppression on broadcast, multicast, or unknown unicast
traffic. This function protects the system against malicious attack from unknown source
and prevents congestion of network caused by excessive amount of broadcast traffic.
There are 12 levels of suppression, which can be displayed by using the command
show traffic-suppress.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#show traffic-suppress
Traffic suppression ID definition:
------------------------------------------------------------------NO.
Min bandwidth(kbps)
Max bandwidth(kbps)
Package number(pps)
------------------------------------------------------------------1
6.1
145.0
12
12.2
290.0
24
24.4
580.0
48
48.8
1160.0
95
97.6
2320.0
191
195.2
4640.0
382
390.4
9280.0
763
780.8
18560.0
1526
1560.0
37120.0
3052
10
3120.0
74240.0
6104
11
6250.0
148480.0
12207
12
12490.0
296960.0
24414
------------------------------------------------------------------Current traffic suppression ID of broadcast
3-15
:4

Current traffic suppression ID of multicast

:12
Current traffic suppression ID of unknowncast :2
You can only choose from the above 12 levels when using the command
traffic-suppress to set the traffic suppression function. You are recommended to use
the default settings: broadcast suppression level 4, multicast suppression level 12 and
unknowncast suppression level 2. For example:
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#traffic-suppress
{ packet-type<E><broadcast,multicast,unknowncast,all> }:broadcast
{ value<1,12> }:4
Set traffic suppression of broadcast successfully
3.2.9 Configuring Trunk

I. Configuring Trunk group
When IP-DSLAM application is configured on the LAND, an FE port on the board will be
selected for upstream traffic. An individual FE port provides a bandwidth of 100M, and
you can use the command trunk to bind two, three or even four of the eight ports on the
board to increase the upstream bandwidth.
Note that the attributes of the ports in the Trunk group must be identical, and they must
have the same VLAN ID.
Note:
z
A Trunk group contains two to four ports.
The MA5100 only supports one Trunk group.
The 1-port interface subboards do not support Trunk function.
The following example shows how to add a Trunk group which contains ports 0/1/2:
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#trunk
{ trunkMask<H><0x1 , 0xff> }:0x7
Add trunk successfully
The command show trunk is used to display the Trunk group information.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#show trunk
----------------------------Trunk Group
Trunk Mask
----------------------------0
0x7(b00000111)
3-16

II. Setting Trunk group operation mode

A Trunk group can work in normal-trunk or load-share mode. normal-trunk is
applicable for a server with multiple interfaces sharing the same MAC address, while
load-share is applicable for a server on which each interface is allocated with an MAC
address.
The command trunk-mode is used to set the operation mode of a Trunk group.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#trunk-mode
{ trunk-mode<E><load-share,normal-trunk> }:load-share
Set trunk mode successfully
3-17

Chapter 4 Configuring LAN Interconnection

4.1 Overview
The MA5100 provides dedicated line interconnection between LANs that are far away
from each other and locate in different network segments.
In this application, PVCs are set up between the LAND boards and the ATM ports (both
optical and electrical) on the MMXC/AIUA boards in different MA5100 devices. The
VLANs are interconnected through optical fiber or other access devices. If the access
device is further connected to the Internet, the LAN interconnection enables
high-speed Internet access on dedicated line.
Figure 4-1 depicts the LAN interconnection networking.
ATM switch
L L
A A
N N
LAN Switch
LAN 1
M
M
X
HUB
LAN 2
L
A
N
M
M
X
HUB
HUB
LAN 3
L L
AA
NN
HUB
LAN 4
LAN 5
Figure 4-1 LAN interconnection networking
4.2 LAN Interconnection Applications

4.2.1 Typical Applications
Refer to Figure 4-1, and there are four typical applications for LAN interconnection of
the MA5100.
4-1

I. Interconnection of LAN1 and LAN2

z
If two LANs are connected to the same LAN board of the MA5100, the ports that
connect these two LANs can be defined into the same VLAN to achieve the
interconnection.
If two LANs are not connected to the same LAN board, two PVCs from the ports
that connect these two LANs can be established to connect the ATM interface on
the MMXC to achieve interconnection through the upper-layer ATM switch.
II. Interconnection between LAN1, LAN2 and LAN3

z
You can connect the three LANs to the same LAN board on the MA5100, and
specify all the three ports into the same VLAN to achieve interconnection.
You can set up three PVCs from the ports that connect these three LANs to the
ATM interface on the MMXC, and use the L2 switching function of the ATM switch
to implement the interconnection.
III. Interconnection of LAN1 and LAN4

You can set up two PVCs between LAN1, LAN4 and the ATM interfaces of their
corresponding MA5100 devices, and implement the interconnection through the ATM
switch.
IV. Interconnection between LAN1, LAN2 and LAN5

z
You can connect LAN1 and LAN2 to the same LAN board on the MA5100, and
define the ports into the same VLAN. Then set up a PVC to the VLAN where LAN
5 is located. LAN interconnection is implemented in this way.
You can also set up three PVCs between the three LANs and the ATM interface on
the MMXC, and use the L2 switching function of the ATM switch to implement the
interconnection.
4.2.2 Configuration Procedures

There are two major procedures for configuring LAN dedicated line interconnection for
the MA5100.
I. Configuring the ports on the LAN board

Refer to descriptions in Chapter 3 Configuring LAN Board for details.
Note:
The LAN board must work in GENERAL mode to support the LAN dedicated line interconnection. You can
use the command show operation-mode to check the current mode.
4-2

II. Configuring PVC for LAN-ATM

The MA5100 provides up to four 155M ATM interfaces to connect with external devices.
By setting up PVC between the LAN and the ATM interface of the MMXC/AIU, the LAN
board is able to provide interconnection between external VLAN and other bridging
devices.
The following takes the establishment of the PVC between the LAN and ATM port on
the MMXC board as an example to illustrate the procedures.
1)
Input the frame number and slot number of the LAN board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:lan
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
2)
Input the VLAN index number.
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:1
3)
Whether to enable CAR function.
{ car<E><on,off> }:off
{ priority<0,7>|off<K> }:off
When used in LAN interconnection, the LAN board does not support CAR and 802.1p
priority function, select off here.
4)
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|fr<K>|adsl<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
5)
Set the VPI and VCI values for the connection.
{ vpi<0,4095> }:11
{ vci<32,65535> }:100
The values of VPI/VCI must be the same with those of the upper-layer device.
6)
Select traffic type and control switch.
{ index<0,511> }:3
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:3
{ upc<K> }:upc
7)
The PVC index number is returned.

4-3

The command show board is recommended to display most of the important

information about the LAN boards.
4.3 Configuration Examples

7#
13#
M
M
X
L
A
N
MA5100-A
Headquarters
LPU port: 9/1

PVC: 0/50
LPU port: 9/3
PVC: 2/50
LPU port: 9/2

PVC: 1/50
3#
7#
L
A
N
M
M
X
ISN 8850
MA5100-B
7#
13#
M
M
X
L
A
N
MA5100-C
Branch B
Branch A
Figure 4-2 LAN interconnection networking
In this networking diagram:
z
The branch offices and the headquarters are connected together through the LAN
boards of the MA5100 devices. The addresses are all in the same network
segment, and there is no division of VLAN. This indicates that VLAN headers are
not carried in the data packets sent between the branch offices and the
headquarters, and packets with VLAN headers will be discarded.
The ports on the LAN boards that connect the branch offices and the headquarters
all work in the tagged mode, and the ports work in the tagged mode by default.
The bandwidth for the dedicated line is 2M.
Other parameters for the configuration are given in the networking diagram.
4-4

Note:
In this example, only the configuration on MA5100-A is given. The configuration on MA5100-B and C is
similar to that for MA5100-A.
II. About the configuration of VLAN and default VLAN

The LAN port shall add a VLAN header to the received data packet that contains no
VLAN header according to the default VLAN setting (which is 2 in this example). The
packet with the header is then forwarded to the upper-layer ATM device through the
PVC between the LAN board and the MMX board. The parameter VLAN ID used for
the configuration of PVC between the LAN and MMX board must be identical with that
contained in the packet sent from the PVC, that is, the default VLAN of the port.
The packet then goes through the ATM switch and reaches the destination MA5100
device. After that, the packet goes through the PVC between the MMX and the LAN
board on the MA5100. Since the VLAN ID contained in the packet is the same with the
default VLAN ID configured on the LAN port, the header is removed when the packet
reaches the port before it is sent to the user.
In the above networking, the LAN ports that connect all the branches and the
headquarters are configured as default VLAN = VLAN = 2.
Note:
The LAN port handles the VLAN headers in the packets differently when the port works in different modes
(tagged or untagged). Refer to the descriptions in 3.2.2 II Configuring LAND port mode of this module for
details.
III. Adding VLAN 2 with ports 0-3

The headquarter LAN is connected to port 0 of the LAN board on the MA5100.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#vlan add
{ vlanId<1,4095> }:2
{ general<K>|region<K> }:general
{ VlanMask<H><0x1 , 0xff> }:0xf
Add VLAN successfully
IV. Adding default VLAN for port 0

MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#default-vlanId
4-5

{ vlanId<1,4095> }:2
Set default VLAN for port 0 successfully.
V. Adding a traffic table

To guarantee the bandwidth for the dedicated line, a 2M traffic table should be added.
{ cbr<K>|ubr<K>|rt-vbr<K>|nrt-vbr<K> }:rt-vbr
rCdvt<K> }:noClpScrCdvt
{ pcrval<1,599039> }:4000
{ scrval<1,599039> }:2000
{ Mbs<K> }:mbs
{ mbsval<1,2000> }:600
{ Cdvt<K> }:cdvt
{ cdvtval<10,26738680> }:10000000
{ <cr>|EnPPDisc<K>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:
Attention: 2000 has been adjusted to rank of 2048 <kbps>
------------------------------------------------------------TD Table
TD Index
: 5
TD Type
: NoClpScrCdvt

Usage Count
: 0
EnPPDISC
: off
EnEPDISC
: off
Traffic Shaping
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 4000 kbps
Clp01Scr
: 2048 kbps
MBS
: 600 cells
CDVT
: 10000000 tenth_us
---------------------------------------------------------------
VI. Establishing PVC between LAN board and ATM port of MMX board
MA5100(config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:lan
4-6

{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:2
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|fr<K>|adsl<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
{ index<0,511> }:5
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:5
{ upc<K> }:upc

MA5100#save
4-7

Chapter 5 Configuring IP-DSLAM Service

In the IP-DSLAM application of the MA5100, the xDSL users are connected to the IP
network through the LAND board on the MA5100.
5.1 Principles
The principles in implementing IP-DSLAM on the MA5100 are described as follows:
z
A PVC that complies with RFC1483B is set up on ATU-R/STU-R for the user PC to
bridge the xDSL port of the MA5100;
Data packets from the PC are sent to the xDSL port, and then to the LAND board
through the PVC between the xDSL port and the VLAN;
The LAND board terminates the PVC and RFC1483B protocol, converts the user
data into Ethernet frames and then transmits them into IP network.
Figure 5-1 shows the networking for IP-DSLAM service of the MA5100.
MA5200
IP
FE/GE
0#
7#
13#
MA5100
S
H
L
A
STU-R
M
M
X
C
L
A
N
D
14#
A
D
L
E
ATU-R
Figure 5-1 Networking for IP-DSLAM service of the MA5100

In IP-DSLAM networking, each LAND board of the MA5100 supports up to 2048 PVCs.
It also supports region VLAN and logical VLAN access modes for different applications.
In logical VLAN mode, each VLAN corresponds to one PVC, and the upper-layer
device that connects with the MA5100 uses the VLAN to distinguish different xDSL
users. This mode is suitable to VLAN-based user management.
5-1

In region VLAN mode, PVCs of multiple xDSL users are converged to the same VLAN,
and then connected to the upper-layer device or other Ethernet devices through the
FE/GE ports on the LAND board. A region VLAN supports up to 2048 PVCs.
In region VLAN, one VLAN corresponds to multiple PVCs, so VLAN is not used to
distinguish between different users; instead, the MAC address is used.
The region VLAN is implemented in this way:
The xDSL user is added into the region VLAN.
Upstream: The LAND board receives the user data packet that is sent over the PVC
between the user and the region VLAN, learns the MAC address and establishes a map
for the VLAN ID, MAC address and the PVC corresponding to the LAND port. Then the
port adds a VLAN tag to the data packet and sends the packet to the upper-layer LAN
Switch.
Downstream: The LAND board receives the data packet that is sent from the
upper-layer LAN Switch, finds out the destination PVC according to the VLAN and
destination MAC address information carried in the packet. If the PVC is found, the
LAND shall send the service data to the user, otherwise, the LAND shall broadcast the
packet to all the users in the region VLAN.

The data configuration for IP-DSLAM service includes three parts: xDSL board
configuration, LAND board configuration and service PVC configuration.
The following takes the configuration of the ADSL board as an example. The
configuration of the SHDSL IP-DSLAM is similar.
I. Configuring the ADSL board

Refer to Chapter 1 Configuring the xDSL Boards for the meaning of parameters and
precautions in the configuration. The procedures for the configuration are as follows:
1)
Configure line profile
You can use the default profile or configure a profile manually if necessary.
2)
Activate the port
If you use the default line profile, there is no need to activate the port. If the line profile
quoted is configured by yourself, the port must be deactivated, and then activated by
using the new line profile.
5-2

II. Configuring the LAND board

Refer to Chapter 3 Configuring LAN Board in this module for details. The procedures
for the configuration are as follows:
1)
Set the operation mode for the LAND board.
The LAND board supports three operation modes: GENERAL, IPDSLAM and
ATM-GROUP. The default one is GENERAL, and you need to change it to IPDSLAM.
2)
Configure VLAN
In IP-DSLAM application, the LAND board supports region VLAN and logical VLAN.
z
If the region VLAN mode is used, the region VLAN must be added in LAND
configuration mode.
If the logical VLAN mode is used, there is no need to configure VLAN.
3)
Configure the 802.1p priority function
Enable the 802.1p priority function of LAND board to guarantee the IP QoS. Only when
this function has been enabled, can you configure the 802.1p priority function when
setting up a PVC.
4)
Add a Trunk group
If extra upstream bandwidth is required, you can use the Trunk function to bind two to
four ports for upstream. In this case, you need to add a Trunk group.
III. Configuring service PVC

Refer to 5.1.2 Configuring IP-DSLAM Service PVC for the meanings of parameters
and detailed configuration procedures. This section describes the issues that need
your attention in the configuration.
z
Add a traffic table item
A traffic table item will be quoted when the MA5100 establishes a PVC. The traffic table
item contains these parameters: traffic type, service category, traffic rate and flow
control setting.
UBR is recommended as the service category for IP-DSLAM service, and you can use
the default traffic table entry (TID=2). When the default traffic table item cannot meet
the requirement, you can add a new one. Refer to section 7.5 Configuring Traffic Table
in the module Basic Operations in this manual for details.
z
Set up CAR
You can set up CAR when establishing a PVC, or you can use the car command to
enable or disable the CAR function of the LAND board after a PVC is established.
z
Configure the 802.1p function
There are eight types of 802.1p priorities, that is, 0-7. When there is a block, the LAND
schedules the IP service carried by the PVC according to the 802.1p priority you set.
5-3

Only when the 802.1p priority function for LAND is enabled, can the configuration take
effect.
5.1.2 Configuring IP-DSLAM Service PVC

There are two ways to implement IP-DSLAM service on the LAND board:
z
When the LAND board works in the IPDSLAM mode, configure region VLAN for
the LAND board and set up the PVC between the ADSL board and the region
VLAN to connect the user to the IP network.
When the LAND board works in the IPDSLAM mode, use the logical VLAN
function (no need to configure VLAN) and set up the PVC between the ADSL
board and the LAND board to connect the user to the IP network.
The following details the configuration of these two PVCs.
I. Configuring ADSL-region VLAN PVC

1)
Specify the frame number, slot number and port number of the ADSL board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
2)
Select region VLAN
sl<K>}:region
Select parameter region. You dont have to enter the VPI/VCI of the ADSL port, since
they have been specified when configuring the region VLAN on the LAND board.
3)
Specify the frame number and slot number for the LAND board.
{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:lan
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
4)
Specify the VLAN ID.
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:2
5)
Enable/disable the CAR function and 802.1p priority function.
{ car<E><on,off> }:on
{ priority<0,7>|off<K> }:3
6)
Select traffic type.
It is recommended to use UBR, the traffic table item is 2.

{ index<0,511> }:2
{ index<0,511> }:2
7)
The system returns PVC connection ID.

5-4

The CAR of the destination will be adjusted to 256 <kbps>,are you sure?
(y/n)[n]: y
II. Configuring logical VLAN PVC

When logical VLAN is used, there is no need to configure VLAN on the LAND board,
because the VLAN is created automatically when the PVC is being established. This
VLAN is bound with the PVC, which means it is established and deleted together with
the PVC. The logical VLAN feature enhances the isolation between subscribers and
improves the security.
1)
Specify the frame number, slot number and port number of the ADSL board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
2)
Specify VPI and VCI.
The VPI and VCI here correspond to the VPI and VCI set at the ADSL Modem that
connects with this ADSL board. They must be consistent. The default setting of the
ADSL Modem is 0 (VPI) and 35 (VCI).
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
3)
Specify the frame number and slot number for the LAND board.
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
4)
Specify the VLAN ID.
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:4
5)
Enable/disable CAR function and 802.1p priority function.
6)
Select traffic type.
It is recommended to use UBR. The traffic table item is 2.

{ index<0,511> }:2
{ index<0,511> }:2
7)
The system returns PVC connection ID.
5-5

5.2 Configuration Example (Region VLAN)

S3526
IP
FE/GE
MA5100
7#
13# 14#
M
M
X
C
VPI/VCI : 0/35
ATU-R
L
A
N
D
A
D
L
E
VPI/VCI : 0/35
32
ATU-R
Figure 5-2 Networking for IP-DSLAM service (region VLAN)

z
In Slot 14 of the MA5100 is an ADSL board, which serves 32 ADSL subscribers. In

Slot 13 is a LAND board that provides FE upstream ports.
Ports 0 and 1 of the LAND board are bound together and connect with upper-layer
LAN Switch.
Add a region VLAN 10.
ADSL subscribers access the network though VLAN 10. The bandwidth is 2 Mbit/s.
This example uses port rate restriction.
Enable the Trunk function to increase the upstream bandwidth. The Trunk group
added contains port 0 and port 1.
Establish the PVC.
II. Configuring LAND board

1)
Configure operation mode.
The default operation mode of the LAND board is general. You can use the show
operation mode command to query its current operation mode, or use the operation
mode command to change the mode to ipdslam.
2)
Add a region VLAN.
{ vlanId<1,4095> }:10
{ vpi<0,127> }:0
5-6

{ vci<32,127> }:35
Add region VLAN successfully, VLAN ID is 10.
3)
Set the operation mode of port 0 and port 1.
Note that the setting must be consistent with that of the opposite side equipment.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#port mode
{ general<K>|ipdslam<K> }:ipdslam
{ negotiate<K>|non-negotiate<K> }:negotiate
{ <cr>|line-selfadaptive<K> }:
Set port work parameters successfully.
MA5100(config-LAN-0/15)#port mode 1 ipdslam negotiate

Set port work parameters successfully..
4)
Add a Trunk group.
MA5100(config-LAN-0/15)#trunk
<trunkMask>{0x1-0xff}:0x03
Add trunk successfully.
III. Configuring ADSL board

The configuration of the ADSL board includes line profile, deactivating ADSL port and
activating ADSL port.
The IP-DSLAM service rate can be controlled by setting port rate restriction or
committed access rate (CAR). In this example the port rate restriction is adopted to limit
the access rate within 2 Mbit/s.
1)
Add an ADSL line profile.

Start adding profile
Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be
neglected
>
Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]:
>
Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]:
>
>
>
Will you set interleaved depth? (y/n)[n]:y
>
Max. downstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128) [8]: 16
>
Max. upstream interleaved depth 2,4,8,16,32,64,128 DMT (2~128) [8]:
>
Will you set noise margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:
>
Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y
0-manual 1-auto(0~1) [0]:
If you want the fixed rate, set the Min. value equal to Max. value
>
Min. bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]:
5-7

>
Max. bit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]: 2048
>
Min. bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [32]:
>
Max. bit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]: 640

2)
Deactivate ADSL ports.
MA5100(config-ADSL-0/14)#deactivate all
3)
Activate ADSL ports by quoting the configured ADSL line profile, the index of
which is 5.
MA5100(config-ADSL-0/14)#activate all 5
IV. Establishing PVC between ADSL port and region VLAN

Follow this example to establish the PVC between each ADSL port (port 0 to port 31)
and the region VLAN:
MA5100(config)#pvc
sl<K>}:region
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:10
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ index<0,511> }:2
pvc adsl 0/14/1 region lan 0/13 vlan 10 off off rx-cttr 2 tx-cttr 2

MA5100#save
5-8

5.3 Configuration Example (Logical VLAN)

The configuration steps for using logical VLAN in IPDSLAM mode are basically the
same as those for using region VLAN. The differences are as follows:
z
You do not have to add a VLAN by yourself.
When configuring the PVC, you need only to specify any available VLAN ID, and
this VLAN will be automatically created and deleted together with the creation and
deletion of the PVC.
MA5200
IP
FE/GE
MA5100
7#
M
M
X
C
VPI/VCI : 0/35
ATU-R
13# 14#
L
A
N
D
A
D
L
E
VPI/VCI : 0/35
32
ATU-R
Figure 5-3 Networking for IP-DSLAM service (II)

z
In this networking mode, the PVC is established between the ADSL board and the
LAND board, and the LAND board is connected to the MA5200 to implement
IP-DSLAM service.
The IP-DSLAM service rate can be controlled by setting port rate restriction to
CAR. In this example CAR is adopted to limit the access rate within 2 Mbit/s. The
802.1p function is also provided.
II. Configuring ADSL board

ADSL ports are activated with line profile 1 defaultly, configuration is not necessary.
III. Configuring operation mode for LAND board

1)
Set the LAND board to work in the IPDSLAM mode.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#operation-mode ipdslam
5-9

mode
Are you sure to switch operation mode and reset current board?(y/n)[n]:y
2)
Show how to configure the 802.1p function for LAND board, with the priority
threshold as 4, and the high/low priority polling ratio as 5:1.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/10)#priority
{ level<K> }:level
{ level<0,6> }:4
{ low-ratio<K> }:low-ratio
{ ratio<0,15> }:1
{ high-ratio<K> }:high-ratio
{ ratio<0,15> }:5
Set 802.1p priority successfully
IV. Configuring traffic table item

The following example shows how to add a traffic table item (TID=5), which limits the
rate at 2048kbit/s.
MA5100(config)#traffic table srvcategory
{ cbr<K>|ubr<K>|rt-vbr<K>|nrt-vbr<K> }:rt-vbr
rCdvt<K> }:noClpScrCdvt
{ pcrval<1,599039> }:4000
{ scrval<1,599039> }:2048
{ Mbs<K> }:mbs
{ mbsval<1,2000> }:600
{ Cdvt<K> }:cdvt
{ cdvtval<10,26738680> }:10000000
{ <cr>|EnPPDisc<K>|EnEPDisc<K>|EnShape<K> }:

---------------------------------------------------------------TD Table
TD Index
: 5
TD Type
: NoClpScrCdvt

Usage Count
: 0
EnPPDISC
: off
5-10

EnEPDISC
: off
Traffic Shaping
: off
Clp01Pcr
: 4000 kbps
Clp01Scr
: 2048 kbps
MBS
: 600 cells
CDVT
: 10000000 tenth_us
--------------------------------------------------------------.
When configuring PVC, the receiving traffic parameter rx-cttr quotes the default traffic
table item (TID=4) to limit the upstream rate at 64 kbit/s, while the sending traffic
parameter tx-cttr quotes the traffic table item (TID=5) that you have added to limit the
downstream rate at 2048 kbit/s.
V. Establishing PVC between ADSL port and LAND board

When establishing the PVC, enable CAR function to validate the flow control function of
the LAND board. You can also enable the CAR function by using the car command
after the PVC has been established.
The following example shows how to set up the PVC between each ADSL port (port 0
to port 31) and the LAND board.
MA5100(config)#pvc
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:1
{ index<0,511> }:4
{ index<0,511> }:5
The CAR of the destination will be adjusted to 2048 <kbps>,are you sure?
(y/n)[n]: y
5-11

VI. Saving the configuration

MA5100#save
5-12

Chapter 6 Configuring Multicast Service

6.1 Overview
Multicast applications are becoming new service demands as streaming data
warehouse and video frequency appear in the IP network. Provisioning broadband
access modes over ADSL/SHDSL have been serving high speed Internet access and
ADSL/SHDSL dedicated line services. Multicast services based on ADSL/SHDSL are
becoming a new profitable market for the carriers, which are mostly used in streaming
multi-media, distant learning, video conferencing, video multicasting, Internet games,
Interdisciplinary
Data
Collection
(IDC)
and
point-to-multipoint
data
transfer
applications.
The MA5100 supports two multicast networking modes, that is, IP DSLAM multicast
networking and ATM DSLAM multicast networking, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Program server
ATM/IP
STM-1
FE/GE
MA5100
LAND
MMXC
xDSL
IGMP packet and

multicast control
message
AUT-R
Video frequency stream
Figure 6-1 Implementation process of multicast service

1)
An xDSL user selects a video program, and the user terminal sends IGMP packets
to the MA5100, applying to join the multicast group of that video program.
2)
The LAND board captures the IGMP packet and sends the user information to the
MMXC board.
6-1

3)
The MMXC board authenticates the user: If this user has the right to watch the
demanded program, the MMXC board sends acknowledge message to the LAND
board and adds the xDSL port of the user into to the multicast group.
4)
In the IP-DSLAM networking mode, the LAND board receives video stream from
the program server and broadcasts the stream to all xDSL ports. In the
ATM-DSLAM networking mode, the MMXC board receives the video stream and
forwards it to the LAND board, which then broadcasts the video stream to all the
xDSL ports.
5)
If an xDSL port belongs to the video multicast group, the port will receive the video
stream. If the xDSL port does not belong to the video multicast group, it will discard
the video stream.
6)
When the user logs off, the logoff message is sent to the MA5100.
7)
When the LAND board detects this IGMP message, it informs the MMXC board
that the user has logged off. The MMXC board will then control the corresponding
xDSL board to delete the xDSL port from the multicast group.
8)
The LAND board sends periodically query message to all multicast users and
maintains the multicast group according to the response message.
The commands for configuring multicast application are listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Commands for multicast configuration
Operation
Command
Command mode
Setting up NTV
ntv
Global
mode
Config
Displaying NTV parameters
show ntv
Global
mode
Config
Adding, deleting or renaming the program

in program library
igmp
add/delete/rename
Global
mode
Config
Querying programs in program library
show igmp program
Global
mode
Config
Adding or deleting programs for the profile
igmp profile profilename add/

delete
Global
mode
Config
Renaming the profile
igmp profile profilename rename
Global
mode
Config
Displaying the profile
show igmp profile
Global
mode
Config
Adding or deleting IGMP user
igmp user add/ delete
Global
mode
Config
Modifying IGMP user attribute
igmp user modify
Global
mode
Config
Displaying IGMP user
show igmp user
Global
mode
Config
6-2
program

Operation
Command
Command mode
Blocking or unblocking IGMP user
(no)igmp block
Global
mode
Config
Adding or deleting multicast PVCs
(no)igmp pvc
Global
mode
Config
Querying multicast PVC
show igmp pvc
Global
mode
Config
Querying received multicast stream
show igmp stream
Global Config mode
Clearing traffic statistics of a multicast

program
clear igmp statistics
Global Config mode
Displaying traffic statistics of a multicast

program
show igmp statistics
Global Config mode
6.2 Configuring Multicast Application

6.2.1 Configuring NTV
I. Setting up default VPI and VCI of the NTV
MA5100(config)#ntv
{ vpi<K>|vci<K>|leave-delay<K>|user-monitor<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,127> }:0
MA5100(config)#ntv vci
{ vci<32,127> }: 35
It is required that the VPI/VCI pair should be consistent with that for the ADSL user.
II. Setting up user leave delay

To guarantee that a users leave does not affect other users watching normally a
program ordered by different terminal users connected to an xDSL port, a certain user
leave delay is required so that the LAND can query whether there remain other users
who order this program. The LAND will determine whether to delete the port from the
multicast group according to the query result.
The default user leave delay is 5000ms.
MA5100(config)#ntv
{ vpi<K>|vci<K>|leave-delay<K>|user-monitor<K> }:leave-delay
{ time-value<300,10000> }:6000
Set the value of user leaving delay time successfully
Set user leaving delay to board 0/13 successfully
6-3

III. Setting up user activity monitoring switch

The user activity monitoring switch is enabled to monitor users entries into and leaves
from the multicast group.
By default, the switch is off.
MA5100(config)#ntv user-monitor
{ on|off<E><on,off> }:on
IV. Querying NTV configuration parameters

The command show ntv command to query the NTV configuration parameters.
MA5100(config)#show ntv
Default VPI
: 0
Default VCI
: 35
User leaving delay(ms)
: 6000
User activity monitor switch : ON
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot Board
Online users Total users
Idle IGMP PVC
Used IGMP PVC
---------------------------------------------------------------------------0/13
H511LAND
0/14
H512ADLD
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2
6.2.2 Configuring Multicast Program Library

You can maintain the program library by adding, deleting or renaming the IGMP
programs.
I. Adding a program
Use the igmp program add command to add a program into the multicast program
library.
MA5100(config)#igmp program
{ add<K>|delete<K>|rename<K> }:add
{ name<S><1,16> }:CCTV-1
{ ip }:224.10.10.1
6-4

{ profile-mask<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x1
Note:
z
ip refers to the multicast IP address of the added program, which must be a class D IP address.
profile-mask is the mask for an IGMP profile, which is expressed in hexadecimal format and ranges
from 0x0 to 0xffffffff. The mask is an equivalent of a 32-bit binary digit. Each bit corresponds to one
profile, where the lowest bit corresponds to profile0 and the highest bit corresponds to profile31. When
a bit is 1, it means that the program is added into the corresponding profile. For example, 0x1 means to
add the program into the program list of profile0, while 0xffffffff means to add the program into the
program lists of all 32 profiles. 0x0 means to add the program into the program library only without
specifying it into the program list of any profile.
The command show igmp program is used to query the operation results.
MA5100(config)#show igmp program all
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Index Program name
IP address
User references Profile references
-------------------------------------------------------------------------0
CCTV4-1
224.10.10.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
II. Renaming a program

The command igmp program rename is used to rename a program in the multicast
program library.
The following example shows how to rename program CCTV-1 to CCTV-2:
MA5100(config)#igmp program rename
{ old-name<S><1,16> }:CCTV-1
{ new-name<S><1,16> }:CCTV-2
The command show igmp program is used to query the operation results.
MA5100(config)#show igmp program all
-------------------------------------------------------------------Index
Program name
IP address
User references
Profile references
-----------------------------------------------------------------0
CCTV-2
224.10.10.1
-------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1
6-5

III. Deleting a program

The command igmp program delete is used to delete a program from the multicast
program library.
MA5100(config)#igmp program delete ip 224.10.10.1
Are you sure to delete program?(y/n)[n]:y
6.2.3 Configuring an IGMP Profile

I. Adding/deleting a program of the IGMP profile
The command igmp program add/delete is used to define the program list of a profile.
The following example shows how to add program CCTV-3 into profile0 and delete
program CCTV-1 from profile1:
MA5100(config)#igmp profile
{ profile-name<S><1,16> }:profile0
{ add<K>|delete<K>|rename<K> }:add
{ program-name<S><1,16> }:CCTV-3
{ add<K>|delete<K>|rename<K> }:delete
{ program-name<S><1,16> }:CCTV-1
Are you sure to delete program in profile?(y/n)[n]:y
II. Renaming an IGMP profile

The command igmp profile rename is used to modify the name of a profile.
{ add<K>|delete<K>|rename<K> }:rename
{ new-name<S><1,16> }:vip-channel
Note:
z
The MA5100 creates 32 default profiles, which are named profile N (N=0~31) respectively.
You can use the igmp profile rename command to rename the profile, but the name must be a unique
one in the system. The profile name is case insensitive, and the length is between 1 and 16 bytes.
6-6

III. Querying an IGMP profile

The command show igmp profile is used to query information about the profile such
as the number of user reference and number of available program.
MA5100(config)#show igmp profile
{ all<K>|name<K> }:name
Profile name
:profile1
User references
:0
Program number
:2
Program list
---------------------------------Program name
IP address
---------------------------------CCTV-3
224.10.10.3
CCTV-2
224.1.1.2
---------------------------------Total: 2
6.2.4 Configuring IGMP User

I. Adding an IGMP user
The command igmp user add is used to add a user into a specified multicast group.
There are two ways to specify a user to be added into a multicast group:
z
Specify the user according to port number.
Specify the user according to region VLAN, in which all users will be added into the
multicast group.
For example: adding an IGMP user according to the designated port number. This user
has the authority to watch all programs in the program library and can watch eight
programs at the same time.
MA5100(config)#igmp user add
{ port<K>|region-vlan<K> }:port
{ frameid/slotid/portid<S><5,8> }:0/14/0
{ profile-name<K>|no-auth<K> }:no-auth
{ max-program-num<1,8> }:8
no-auth means no authentication of the user, which is to say that the user has the
authority to watch all programs in the program library.
max-program-num means the number of programs that can be watched at the same
time.
6-7

The command show igmp user is used to query the operation result.
The following example shows how to add a user into profile1 and authorize this user to
watch all programs in the list of profile1:
MA5100(config)#igmp user
{ block<K>|add<K>|modify<K>|delete<K> }:add
{ profile-name<K>|no-auth<K> }:profile-name
{ name<S><1,16> }:profile1
MA5100(config)#show igmp profile name profile1

Profile name
:Profile1
User references
:1
Program number
:2
Program list
---------------------------------Program name
IP address
---------------------------------CCTV-3
224.10.10.3
CCTV-2
224.1.1.2
---------------------------------Total: 2
II. Modifying IGMP user attribute

The command igmp user modify is used to modify the attribute of an IGMP user.
MA5100(config)#igmp user modify
The command show igmp user is used to query the operation result.
III. Deleting an IGMP user

The command igmp user delete is used to delete a user from the multicast group.
MA5100(config)#igmp user delete
Are you sure to delete users of specified port?(y/n)[n]:y
6-8

IV. Blocking/unblocking an IGMP user

The command (no) igmp block is used to block/unblock an IGMP user in order to
enable/disable the multicast service of the user temporarily. For example:
MA5100(config)#igmp user block
Are you sure to block users of specified port?(y/n)[n]:y
Block 1 user(s) successfully
V. Querying IGMP user information

The command show igmp user is used to query the IGMP user information.
6.2.5 Configuring IGMP PVC

IGMP PVC, also known as the multicast PVC, is used to transmit video data. Each
program channel occupies an IGMP PVC, and the system supports a maximum of 64
IGMP PVCs.
I. Adding an IGMP PVC

When adding an IGMP PVC, you need to specify the frame number and slot number of
the LAND board, the number of the IGMP PVCs to be added in batches, and the
service type.
The following example shows how to establish three multicast PVCs, in which the
LAND board locates on frame 0, slot 14, and the service type is rt-vbr.
MA5100(config)#igmp pvc
{ number<1,64> }:3
{ srvcategory<E><cbr,rt-vbr,nrt-vbr,ubr> }:rt-vbr
Add IGMP PVC successfully, ICID is 0
II. Querying information about IGMP PVC

The command show igmp pvc is used to query the IGMP PVCs you have configured.
For example:
MA5100(config)#show igmp pvc
Cutline illuminate:
'*': The connection may be of no effect for lower version
Default VPI: 0
6-9

Default VCI: 35
-------------------------------------------------------------------ICID
Frame
IP address
Program
Online
name
users
/Slot
Status
Service
category
-------------------------------------------------------------------0
0/14
--
Idle
Rt_VBR
0/14
--
Idle
Rt_VBR
0/14
--
Idle
Rt_VBR
-------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 3
III. Deleting an IGMP PVC

You can batch-delete the IGMP PVCs of a LAND board by specifying the slot number of
the board, or delete an individual IGMP PVC by specifying its ICID.
MA5100(config)#no igmp pvc
{ slot<K>|icid<K> }:slot
Delete IGMP PVC successfully, ICID is 0
6.2.6 Querying the Received Multicast Stream

The command show igmp stream is used to query the multicast stream that the LAND
board has received.
MA5100(config)#show igmp stream 0/14
----------------------------------------------------------------NO.
Program name
IP address
----------------------------------------------------------------1
PROGRAM1
224.1.1.1
PROGRAMLIST
224.2.127.254
PROGRAM2
224.1.1.2
----------------------------------------------------------------Total: 3
6-10

6.2.7 Querying Traffic Statistics of a Program

I. Setting the traffic query switch of a program
The command igmp traffic-query switch is used to enable/disable the query switch
for a program. By default, it is disabled. If you want to query the traffic of a program, you
should enable its query switch first. For example:
MA5100(config)#igmp traffic-query switch
{ name<K>|ip<K> }:ip
{ ip }:224.1.1.1
{ on<K>|off<K> }:on
traffic switch is on
II. Querying traffic of a program

The command show igmp traffic is used to query the traffic information about a
program by specifying the program name or multicast address.
MA5100(config)#show igmp traffic
{ ip<K>|name<K> }:ip
{ ip }:224.1.1.1
-----------------------------IP address
Traffic(kbps)
-----------------------------224.1.1.1
416
III. Querying total traffic of a program

The command show igmp statistic is used to display the total traffic of a program by
specifying the program name or multicast address
MA5100(config)#show igmp statistics
{ ip }:224.1.1.16
---------------------------------IP address
Statistics(bytes)
---------------------------------224.1.1.16
3415567
IV. Clearing the statistics

The command clear igmp statistic is used to clear the traffic statistics of a program.
For example:
MA5100(config)#clear igmp statistics
6-11

{ ip }:224.1.1.16
Clear statistic information successfully
6.3 Application Examples

The environment for running IGMP multicast application is as follows:
z
The client multicast program at user side must support IGMP V1 or IGMP V2
protocol.
The multicast server and server program must be configured at network side, and
the network layer equipment that connects with the MA5100 must support IGMP
V1 or IGMP V2 protocol.
6.3.1 MA5100 Multicast Networking

I. IP-DSLAM multicast networking of the MA5100
Internet
Program source
FE/GE
Multicast router
FE/GE
MA5100
SHDSL
MA5103
ADSL
ADSL
SHDSL
Figure 6-2 IP-DSLAM multicast networking of the MA5100

In this networking mode, the multicast service flow enters the MA5100 through the
FE/GE ports on the LAND board. The LAND board then transmits the service flow to
the xDSL ports through multicast PVC between the LAND board and xDSL ports.
Finally the xDSL ports transmit the service flow to the multicast users.
6-12

II. ATM-DSLAM multicast networking of the MA5100
ATM
Multicast server
STM-1
STM-1
MA5100
SHDSL
MA5103
ADSL
ADSL
SHDSL
Figure 6-3 ATM-DSLAM multicast networking of the MA5100

In this networking mode, no upper-layer device that supports multicast routing function
is needed. The multicast server sends the multicast service flow to the upstream
interface of the MA5100 through the ATM network, while the service flow enters the
MA5100 through the upstream interface on the MMXC board. The MMXC board sends
the service flow to the LAND board through one or more PVCs inside the MA5100, and
then the LAND board forwards the service flow to the xDSL ports.

The configurations for IP-DSLAM and ATM-DSLAM multicast are basically the same.
There are three major steps: configuring xDSL, configuring LAND and configuring
multicast service, as described in detail below.
I. Configuring xDSL
1)
Configure line profile
2)
Deacitvate xDSL ports
3)
Activate xDSL ports
II. Configuring LAND

1)
Set the operation mode.
In IP-DSLAM networking, set the LAND board to work in IP DSLAM mode. In

ATM-DSLAM networking, set it to work in ATM-GROUP mode.
6-13

2)
Configure VLAN.
To use the region VLAN feature, use the vlan add command to add a region VLAN.
With the logical VLAN, you can input an idle VLAN ID directly when the unicast PVC
between ADSL and LAN is being established.
The VLAN ID should be consistent with that of the upper-layer equipment.
3)
Set 802.1p priority function.
Enable the 802.1p priority function of LAND board to guarantee the IP QoS. In
ATM-GROUP mode, this function is not supported.
III. Configuring PVC

1)
Set up ADSL-LAND PVC
2)
Set up LAND-ATM PVC
In ATM-DSLAM multicast mode, a PVC from the LAND to the ATM port must be set up
for forwarding video stream and unicast data from the ATM network.
In IP-DSLAM multicast mode, the LAND board receives video stream and unicast data
from the IP network directly, so this configuration is not needed.
IV. Configuring multicast application

1)
Configure NTV
2)
Configure program library
3)
Configure profile
4)
Configure multicast user
5)
Configure multicast PVC
The following takes the configuration of ADSL multicast service as an example. The
configuration of SHDSL multicast service is basically the same.
6-14

6.3.3 Configuration Example for IP-DSLAM Multicast Application

Internet
VLAN ID1000
Multicast server
MA5100
7#
14#
13#
L
A
N
D
M
M
X
C
FE
A
D
L
E
32
ATU-R
VPI/VCI:0/35
ATU-R
VPI/VCI:0/35
Figure 6-4 IP-DSLAM multicast networking for the MA5100

z
The ADSL board is installed at slot 14. The VPI/VCI used by the ATU-R
connecting to the board is 0/35.
The LAND board is installed at slot 13, which works in IP-DSLM mode. It provides
FE ports to connect with upper layer multicast router. When the region VLAN is
used, the VLAN ID should be consistent with that of the upper-layer equipment. In
this example, it is 1000.
The multicast server provides 15 sets of programs. Each program has a unique
multicast address from 224.1.1.1 to 224.1.1.15. The program list provided by the
server is sent to each user in the multicast group in multicast mode. The multicast
address is 224.2.127.254.
Two users (users A and B) are configured. The authority of User A (connecting to
ADSL port 3) is defined in profile0, which allows User A to watch program1
(224.1.1.1) and program2 (224.1.1.2), and allows User A to be added into the
multicast group 224.2.127.254. User B (connecting to ADSL port 6) does not need
any authentication, and is able to watch all the programs.
II. Configuring ADSL

Based on the default ADSL line profile (profile1), configuration is not necessary.
6-15

III. Configuring LAND

1)
Set the operation mode.
The LAND board works in general mode by default. You can use the show
operation-mode command to query its current operation mode.
In this example, the multicast service is implemented in IP-DSLAM mode. Therefore,
the command operation-mode is used to switch the operation mode of LAND board to
IPDSLAM.
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#operation-mode
{ mode<E><general,ipdslam,atm-group> }:ipdslam
mode
Are you sure to switch operation mode and reset current board?(y/n)[n]:y.
2)
Configure region VLAN.
Add a region VLAN, with VLAN ID as 1000 and VPI/VCI as 0/35.

{ vlanId<1,4095> }:1000
{ vpi<0,127> }:0
{ vci<32,127> }:35
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#
Add region VLAN successfully, VLAN ID is 1000
IV. Configuring ADSL-LAND unicast PVC

Set up two unicast PVCs between ADSL ports 3, 6 and the LAND board respectively.
MA5100(config)#pvc
sl<K>}:region
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
{ vlan<1,4095> }:1000
{ index<0,511> }:2
6-16

{ index<0,511> }:2
MA5100(config-if-lan-0/13)#pvc adsl 0/14/6 region lan 0/13 vlan 1000 off off
rx-cttr 2 tx-cttr 2
The service type ubr is recommended when the MA5100 is used as IP-DSLAM
equipment.
V. Configuring multicast application

1)
Configure NTV.
Use VPI/VCI of default multicast PVC (0/35).

Enable user activity monitoring switch to detect in real time the activity of leaving from
or adding into the multicast group.
MA5100(config)#ntv user-monitor on
2)
Maintain program library and profile.
The commands igmp program add/delete and igmp profile add/delete are used to
maintain the program library and profile. Maintain profile0, and make sure that it
includes three programs: PROGRAM1(224.1.1.1), PROGRAM2(224.1.1.2), and
PROGRAMLIST(224.2.127.254).
For example, querying profile0:
MA5100(config)#show igmp profile
{ all<K>|name<K> }:name
Profile name
:Profile0
User references
:1
Program number
:3
Program list
---------------------------------Program name
IP address
---------------------------------PROGRAM1
PROGRAMLIST
224.1.1.1
224.2.127.254
PROGRAM2
224.1.1.2
---------------------------------Total: 3
3)
Add an IGMP user.
For example, add an IGMP user A, whose authority is defined by profile0, and is able to
watch three program channels simultaneously.
6-17

MA5100(config)#igmp user add

{ profile-name<K>|no-auth<K> }:profile-name
{ name<S><1,16> }:profile0
For example, add an IGMP user B, who needs no authentication and is able to watch
eight program channels simultaneously.
MA5100(config)#igmp user add port
4)
Set up multicast PVC
MA5100(config)#igmp pvc
{ number<1,64> }:4
{ srvcategory<E><cbr,rt-vbr,nrt-vbr,ubr> }:rt-vbr
VI. Saving the configuration

MA5100#save
6.3.4 Configuration Example for ATM-DSLAM Multicast Application

The networking diagram is as shown in Figure 6-5.
6-18

ATM
Program source
MA5100
7#
M
M
X
C
13# 14#
L
A
N
D
ATU-R
VPI/VCI:0/35
A
D
L
E
32
ATU-R
VPI/VCI:0/35
Figure 6-5 ATM-DSLAM multicast networking for the MA5100
II. Configuring ADSL

The configuration is the same as that used in IP-DSLAM mode.
III. Configuring LAND

Set the LAND board to work in ATM-GROUP mode. In ATM-GROUP mode, LAND does
not support the 802.1p priority function. Other configurations are the same with those
used in IP-DSLAM mode.
IV. Configure ADSL-LAND unicast PVC

The configurations are the same with those used in IP-DSLAM mode.
V. Configure LAND-ATM PVC

In the ATM-DSLAM multicast mode, multicast service flow from the ATM network is
firstly received by the MMXC board, then forwarded to the LAND board, and finally
transmitted to the xDSL ports. Therefore, it is necessary to set up the LAND-ATM PVC
to carry multicast service flow.
MA5100(config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:lan
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/13
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
6-19

{ vlan<1,4095> }:2
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
VI. Configuring multicast application

The configurations are the same with those for IP-DSLAM mode.

MA5100#save
6-20

Chapter 7 Configuring IMA Service

7.1 Overview
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) provides inverse multiplexing of ATM cell stream
over multiple physical links and to retrieve the original stream at the far-end from these
physical links. It enables delivery of ATM cells over the existing links, especially the
2Mbit/s links.
The IMA technology involves multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells among links
grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link. The functional group that accomplishes
the inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing is referred to as an IMA group. An IMA
group is terminated at the endpoints of an IMA virtual connection.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the IMA technology.
IMA group
IMA group
Physical link 0
PHY
PHY
Physical link1
PHY
PHY
Single ATM cell stream
from ATM layer
Original ATM cell stream

to ATM layer
Physical link 2
PHY
PHY
IMA virtual link

Tx direction: cells distributed across links in round robin sequence
Rx direction: cells recombined into single ATM stream
Figure 7-1 Inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells through IMA group
IMA is applicable to transmitting ATM cells over E1 lines or other interfaces.
The MA5100 uses the H511E8IT subboard to provide channels between the ATM port
and the E1 port. Through the E1 port, the MA5100 can be interconnected with the
remote low-speed ATM device.
The IMA subboard can be attached to either the MMX board or the AIU board. A IMA
subboard supports four IMA groups, each of which can be configured with 1~8 E1 links.
Each E1 link can only belong to one IMA group.
Steps for IMA configuration are as follows.
1)
Add an IMA Group.

7-1

2)
Configure an IMA Group.
3)
Configure an IMA link.
4)
Configure PVC.
5)
Save the data.
7.2 Setting DIP Switches

H511E8IT supports two kinds of coaxial cables: 75 cable and 120 cable. You can
make the selection by setting the DIP switches on the subboard.
Each subboard has five groups of DIP switches. S5 has four bits, and S1, S2, S3 and
S4 has eight bits.
Table 7-1 lists the status of the DIP switches.
Table 7-1 H511E8IT DIP switch
Switch
75 cable
120 cable
S1
Bits 1~8 ON
Bits 1~8 OFF
S2
Bits 2, 4, 6, 8 OFF. Bits 1,3, 5, 7 ON
Bits 1~8 OFF
S3
Bits 1~8 ON
Bits 1~8 OFF
S4
Bits 2, 4, 6, 8 OFF. Bits 1,3, 5, 7 ON
Bits 1~8 OFF
S5
Bits 1 OFF. Bits 2, 3, 4 ON
Bits 1~4 ON
By default, the H511E8IT uses the 75 coaxial cable.
7.3 IMA Configuration Commands

7.3.1 Adding an IMA Group
I. Adding an IMA group
The ATM Inverse Multiplexing technology involves multiplexing and de-multiplexing of
ATM cells. H511E8IT supports a maximum of four IMA groups. Each IMA group has a
unique IMA group index and IMA ID. Generally, they are set at the same value. Only
when two interconnected IMA groups have the same IMA ID, can the loopback be
activated.
The command ima group add is used to add an IMA group.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/6.ima)#ima group add
{ groupId<0,3> }:0
{ version<E><version1.1,version1.0> }:version1.0
7-2

{ minTxLinks<1,8> }:3
{ minRxLinks<1,8> }:3
{ clock<E><ctc,itc> }:ctc
{ imaid<0,255> }:0
{ framelength<E><32,64,128,256> }:128
{ alpha_value<1,2> }:2
{ beta_value<1,5> }:2
{ gamma_value<1,5> }:1
IMA group add successfully
z
version1.0 and version1.1 are two versions of inverse multiplexing for ATM
minTxLinks, minRxLinks refers to the minimum transmit links and the minimum
specification. IMA groups with different versions cannot interwork with each other.
receiving links. Any IMA group contains some links. Therefore, the minimum link
counts must be configured. minTxLinks and minRxLinks must be of the same
value.
z
ctc and itc are two options of clock mode. In common transmit clock (CTC) mode,
transmit clocks for all links in a group are from a common clock source. In
independent transmit clock (ITC), transmit clocks for various links in a group are
from different clock sources. When IMA works in line clock mode, it is
recommended to use ITC mode.
framelength refers to the length of an IMA frame It indicates the cell counts in a
frame. Options are 32, 64, 128 and 256. Generally, it is set to 128.
For ICP cells,
alpha_value represents number of invalid ICP cells, and the value of 2 is

recommended.
beta_value represents number of error ICP cells, and the value of 2 is

recommended.
gamma_value represents number of valid ICP cells, and the value of 1 is

recommended.
In the case of IMA frame synchrony state (namely, frame by frame), as long as on
a single link the number of successive invalid ICP cells reaches the predefined
alpha_value, or the number of successive error ICP cells reaches the predefined
beta_value, the link returns to the IMA capture state.
In the case of IMA frame pre-synchrony state, as long as the number of

successive valid ICP cells reach the predefined gamma_value, it is regarded that
the link is in IMA frame synchrony state.
In actual application, one local IMA group corresponds to one remote IMA group.
II. Blocking an IMA group

The command ima group block is used to block an IMA group.
The following example shows how to block IMA group 0.
7-3

MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/11.ima)#ima group block

{ groupIndex<0,3> }:0
IMA group block successfully
Note:
Link must exist in the IMA group before the group is blocked, otherwise, there will be error prompt.
III. Deleting an IMA group

The command ima group delete is used to delete an IMA group.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group delete
IMA group delete success
7.3.2 Configuring IMA Group Mode

I. Configuring IMA group clock mode
To configure the clock mode, use the command ima group mode.
Note:
z
The keyword clockmode is used to specify the clock mode. Options are system and line. Clock in the
IMA subboard is the board clock itself under the system mode. System mode is the default mode.
Clock in the IMA subboard is the line recovery clock under the line mode.
To connect two IMA groups, one group must be under the system mode, and the other group under the
line mode. To connect the M5100 IMA subboard with device by other manufacturers, it is
recommended to use the line mode.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group mode

{ scramble<K>|crc4-multiframe<K>|clockmode<K> }:clockmode
{ groupIndex<0,3>|all<K> }:0
{ mode<E><line,system> }:line
Set IMA group transmit clock success
II. Enabling IMA group CRC4

By default, CRC4 is disabled in the H511E8IT. To interconnect with devices by other
manufacturers, the MA5100 must be set with the same CRC4 configuration as the peer
end. If CRC4 is enabled in the interconnected device, it must be enabled in the
7-4

H511E8IT as well (namely ON). If CRC4 is disabled in the interconnected device, it

must be disabled in the H511E8IT (namely OFF).
The command ima group mode is used to enable CRC4.
{ scramble<K>|crc4-multiframe<K>|clockmode<K> }:crc4-multiframe
{ switch<E><on,off> }:on
set CRC4 switch sucessfully
III. Enabling or disabling IMA group scramble

The keyword scramble is used to enable the scramble function. It is an interference
means that is enabled in the chip. To interconnect two IMA groups, the status of
scramble function in both ends must be configured the same, both as ON or OFF.
By default, scramble is disabled in the H511E8IT IMA.
The command ima group mode is used to enable the scramble function.
{ scramble<K>|crc4-multiframe<K>|clockmode<K> }:scramble
{ switch<E><on,off> }:on
set scrambel switch sucessfully
7.3.3 Configuring an IMA Link

H511E8IT provides 8-channel E1 ports. One end of the E1 cable uses a DB50 PIN
connector, which is connected with the E1 port on the H511E8IT. There are four pairs of
coaxial cables at the other end of E1 cable, which are labeled as T0, R0, T1, R1, T2, R2,
T3 and R3. Tx and RX belong to the same E1 link.
H511E8IT supports only the symmetric operation mode. Therefore, E1 cable must be
connected properly, with Tx in one end connected to the Ry in the other end, and Rx in
one end connected to the Ty.
I. Adding an IMA link

Each IMA subboard can be configured with 1~8 E1 links. Each E1 link can only belong
to one IMA group.
The command ima link add is used to add one or multiple links in an IMA group.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima link add
{ linkId<0,7> }:0
IMA link add success
7-5

II. Deleting an IMA link

The command ima link delete is used to delete a link from an IMA group. However, this
command cannot delete the last link in the IMA group. See the following example.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima link delete
{ linkId<0,7> }:0
IMA link delete fail (this is the last link in the group)
To delete the last link, the command ima group delete that deletes the whole group
must be used.
MA5100(config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group delete
IMA group delete success
To delete an IMA link from one group and add it into another group, make sure that the
links are deleted on both the local end and the remote end. Otherwise, the
configuration in the local end and the remote end is inconsistent, which will affect the
system normal performance.
7.3.4 Configuring PVC

IMA subboard can be attached to the MMX board or AIU board.
In the PVC creation, the parameter groupindex refers to the IMA group number.
The following example shows how to create an ADSL-IMA PVC.
MA5100(config)#pvc
{ atm<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-udt<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|lan<K>|fr<K>|
ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:adsl
{ vpi<K>|adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ adsl<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K> }:ima
{ frame/slot<S><3,5> }:0/0
{ groupindex<K> }:groupindex
{ groupindex<0,3> }:0
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:40
{ index<0,5119> }:2
7-6

{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,5119> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
Create PVC successfully!connection ID = 0
7.4 Configuration Examples

7.4.1 Networking Diagram
ISN 8850
ATM
7#
15#
M
M
X
A
I
U
MA5100
n E1
IMA
VPI: 0 VCI: 35
MA5103-A
MA5103-B
MT800
R
Figure 7-2 Networking for IMA service

z
The MA5100 is deployed as the main node, and the MA5103 is deployed as the
sub node. An IMA subboard is attached to the MA5100-As AIU board,
MA5103-Bs MMX board, and MA5103-Cs MMX board respectively.
In star networking topology, it is recommended make the following configurations:

when the main node uses the system clock mode, the sub node uses the line clock
mode; whereas when interconnecting with IMA equipment supplied by a vendor
other than Huawei, Huaweis IMA equipment uses the line clock mode, and other
vendors IMA equipment uses system clock mode.
When IMA group is configured to work in line clock mode, it is recommended to

use ITC mode.
It is recommended to configure the local and remote end with the same IMA ID.
Otherwise, loopback cannot be activated.
7-7

z
The subboard DIP switches are configured properly.
7.4.2 Configuring the Main Node (MA5100)

I. Adding IMA group 0 to interconnect with MA5103-A
IMA group 0 contains four links (0~3), and uses CTC clock mode.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group add
{ groupId<0,3> }:0
{ imaid<0,255> }:0
{ framelength<E><32,64,128,256> }:128
IMA group add successfully.
II. Adding the sub node links by adding four E1 links to group 0
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima link add
{ linkId<0,7> }:0
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima link add 0 1



III. Specifying group 0 of the main node as in system clock mode

MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group mode
{ mode<E><line,system> }:system
7-8

IV. Adding IMA group 1 to interconncet with MA5103-B

IMA group 1 contains four links (4~7), and uses CTC clock mode.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group add
{ groupId<0,3> }:1
{ imaid<0,255> }:1
{ framelength<E><32,64,128,256> }:128
V. Adding the main node links by adding four E1 links to group 1




VI. Specifying group 1 as in system clock mode

MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.ima)#ima group mode
{ mode<E><line,system> }:system
VII. Create PVC

Create the IMA (groupindex =0) ATM PVC, as illustrated in below:
MA5100(config)#pvc ima
{ frame/slot<S><1,15> }:0/12
{ groupindex<K> }:groupindex
7-9

{ vpi<K>|ces-udt<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|ima<K>|lan<K>|fr<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ce
s-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|shdsl<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ ces-udt<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|ima<K>|lan<K>|fr<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ce
s-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|shdsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:100
{ ces-udt<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|ima<K>|lan<K>|fr<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K
>|ces-v35<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:40
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc
Create PVC successfully!connection ID = 0
The methods for establishing IMA (groupindex=1)-ATM PVC are completely the same,
and the description is omitted here.
VIII. Saving the configuration

MA5100#save
7.4.3 Configuring the Sub Nodes

Configuration of the sub node MA5103-A is the same as that of the sub node
MA5103-B. The following takes MA5103-A for example to introduce the sub node
configuration.
I. Adding IMA group 0

This group includes four links. ITC clock mode is used. Make sure that IMA ID of the
interconnected IMA devices are the same. It is 0 in this example.
MA5103 (config-if-mmx-0/7.ima)#ima group add
{ groupId<0,3> }:0
7-10

{ clock<E><ctc,itc> }:itc
{ imaid<0,255> }:0
{ framelength<E><32,64,128,256> }:128
II. Specifying the sub node to use line clock mode

MA5103 (config-if-mmx-0/7.ima)#ima group mode
{ mode<E><line,system> }:line
III. Adding sub node links by adding four E1 links to group 0

MA5103 (config-if-mmx-0/7.ima)#ima link add 0 0



IV. Creat the PVC (VPI: 1, VCI: 100)

MA5103 (config)#pvc adsl
sl<K>}:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:ima
{ frame/slot<S><3,5> }:0/7
7-11

{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ vci<32,65535> }:100
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc

MA5100#save
7-12

Chapter 8 Configuring Local Cascading

8.1 Overview
Local cascading is also referred to as SEP cascading. With local cascading, multiple
MA5100 sub frames are cascaded to expand the ADSL access capacity of the
single-point MA5100. One MA5100 master frame can have four subnetting slave
frames which together facilitate access of 2000 lines of users. For the MA5103, local
cascading is not recommended.
Table 8-1 describes the boards used in local cascading implementation.
Table 8-1 Boards used in local cascading implementation.
Board
Description
Function
SEPA
Local cascading board, provides

4%LVDS subtending ports when
attached with a H511CIMA subboard.
SEPA supports hot backup.
It communicates with the SMXB through high

speed electrical ports, and convergences and
dimultiplexes the cells between the master and
slave frames in cordination with the SMXB.
SMXB
Main control board on the slave

frame, which coordinates with SEPA,
and provides two LVDS subtending
electrical ports (active/standby).
It convergences and dimultiplexes the cells

between the master and slave frames. It
communicates with the master frame through
the LVDS cable, so as to manage and maintain
the slave frames under the control of the master
frame.
Figure 8-1 illustrates the networking of local cascading.
8-1

ATM
7#
14# 15#
S
E
P
M
M
X
Active Standby
Master frame
7#
A
D
S
L
S
M
X
B
S
E
P
Internal differential
concatenation busbar
7#
A
D
S
L
A
D
S
L
Slave frame 1
7#
S
M
X
B
A
D
S
L
Slave frame 2
A
D
S
L
S
M
X
B
Slave frame 3
7#
A
D
S
L
A
D
S
L
S
M
X
B
A
D
S
L
Slave frame 4
Figure 8-1 Networking for local cascading of the MA5100
8.2 Features
z
Cascading through high speed electrical ports
The cascading is accomplished through the LVDS high-speed serial differential signal,
featuring high bandwidth and reliability.
z
Star topology that supports cascading of up to 4 slave frames
Star topology is applied in cascading between the master frame and the slave frames.
The bandwidth for each slave frame is: 80M upstream, and 120M downstream. Star
topology boasts high reliability in that the service running on a slave frame does not
affect that of another one. However, if link topology cascading is applied, faults on an
upstream node will result in connection failure, thus making the downstream nodes
unable to work normally.
z
1+1 hot backup
1+1 hot backup can be realized through switchover between the master frame and the
slave frame, hence also ensuring high reliability.
8.3 Hardware Configuration

I. Master frame configuration
The master frame can be configured a maximum of one pair of SEP boards working in
active/standby mode. If the hot backup function is not needed, the master frame can be
configured with only one DEP board.
z
When one SEP board is configured

8-2

In the local cascading implementation, if the master frame is equipped with only one
SEP board, it is recommended to plug it into slot 14 (where slot 15 is left empty). Or, you
can also insert the SEP board to the even slot of any other slot group (0~1, 2~3, 4~5,
10~11, 12~13). Note that then the other slot of the slot group cannot be inserted with
other service board.
z
When one pair of SEP boards are configured
If the master frame is equipped with one pair of SEP boards, it is recommended to plug
them into slots 14 and 15. Or, you can also insert the SEP boards to any other slot
group (0~1, 2~3, 4~5, 10~11, 12~13).
In the case of active/standby switchover, avoid cross-connecting the LVDS cable used
for cascading. That is, the active/standby ports on the SMXB board should be
connected to the corresponding ports on the active/standby SEP boards. Otherwise it
may result in inconsistency of the host data with the board data. In addition, do not pull
out the LVDS cable from an SEP port and reconnect it to some other port for fear of
service failure.
II. Slave frame configuration

The SMXB board on the slave frame does not support 1+1 hot backup. It can be
inserted to either slot 7 or slot 8 of the slave frame. The high-speed serial electrical port
on the front panel of the SMXB board is used to connect to the SEPA board on the
master frame. The service board slots on the slave frame can only be seated with the
ADSL board or the SPL board.
III. Frame numbering

The frame number of the master frame is 0.
The frame number of a slave frame is determined by the number of the port on the
master frame connected with the slave frame. For example, the four cascading ports on
the SEP board (namely, SB0, SB1, SB2 and SB3) correspond respectively to slave
frames 1, 2, 3 and 4.
8.4 Service Configuration

In local cascading, the ADSL service configuration for the slave frame is the same as
that of the master frame. In the actual operation, you need to input the correct frame
number of the ADSL service board.
The following example shows how to configure the board for slave frame 1.
-------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID
BoardName Status
SubType0 SubType1
8-3

-------------------------------------------------------------------0
1
2
3
H511ADLD
Normal
H511ADLD
Normal
H511SMXB
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
10
H511ADLE
Normal
H512ADLD
Normal
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
--------------------------------------------------------------------
The following section takes port 6 of the ADSL board in slot 14 as example to show how
to configure the ADSL service.
1)
Use the system default ADSL line profile to activate the ADSL port 6.
2)
Use the traffic table with the index number of 2 as the ADSL traffic table, that is,
the service type is UBR, and the traffic type is NO-CLP-SCR.
3)
Create the PVC between port 6 on the ADSL board in slot 14 of frame 1 and the
optical port on the MMXC.
MA5100(config)#pvc adsl
{ vpi<K>|adsl<K>|atm<K>|lan<K>|e3<K>|ces-uni<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535> }:35
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ vci<32,65535> }:40
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
8-4

{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
4)
Save the configuration.
MA5100(config)#save
8-5

Chapter 9 Configuring Remote Cascading

The AIU board is an ATM port board used to implement the remote cascading of the
MA5100. It is equipped with subboards to provide various ports for the MA5100, such
as the STM-1 optical/electrical port, OC-3c/STSc-3 port, E3 port, or IMA port.
9.1 Remote Cascading Using 155M Interface Subboard

When the AIU board is attached with a 155M optical port subboard, you can set the port
mode to STM-1 or OC-3c through the command line interface.
When the AIU board is attached with a 155M electrical/optical port subboard, you can
set the port mode to STM-1 or STS-3c through the command line interface.
The default mode of the optical/electrical port is STM-1.
The configuration method for remote cascading for the 155M optical port subboard is
the same as that for the 155M electrical port subboard. The following section takes the
STM-1 optical port for example to illustrate how to perform the remote cascading
configuration.
Remote cascading of the MA5100s is accomplished through the 155M ATM optical port
on the AIU board. Through the 155M ATM optical port, the MA5100 in the office end
connects to multiple MA5100s in the remote end in a point-to-point star topology. The
remote MA5100s can access ADSL, CES, FR or LAN users, and the office-end
MA5100 can then access the traffic from the remote MA5100s to the ATM network or IP
network through its MMX board or LAND board.
Figure 9-1 shows the networking.
9-1

ATM
ATM 155M
MA5100-A
FE/GE
IP
L
A
N
D
M
M
X
C
A
I
U
A
ATM 155M
MA5100-C
MA5100-B
A
D
L
E
M
M
X
C
A
D
L
E
M
M
X
C
Figure 9-1 Remote cascading using the 155M ATM optical port subboard
z
The MMXC board on MA5100-B connects upstream to the AIU board on

MA5100-A. MA5100-A can access remote users of MA5100-B to the ATM network
through the established connection between the AIU board and the optical port on
the MMXC board.
The MMXC board on MA5100-C connects upstream to the LAND board on

MA5100-A. MA5100-A can access the remote users of MA5100-C to the IP
network through the established connection between the AIU board and the port
on the LAND board.
II. Configuring MA5100-A

1)
Enter the OPTIC configuration mode.
MA5100 (config)#interface aiu 0/15

MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15)#
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15)#sub-interface
{ ima<K>|electric<K>|optic<K>|e3<K> }:optic
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/15.optic)#
2)
Set the port mode.
The 155M optical port can have two modes: STM-1, OC-3c. The command portmode
is used to set the port mode. By default, the port mode is STM-1.
In this example, the default port mode STM-1 is used, so manual configuration is
unnecessary.
3)
Set the port type.
Two port types are available: UNI and NNI. The command uni-nni-set is used to set
the port type. When the UNI port type is used, the VPI value is 0~255; when the NNI
port type is used, the VPI value is 0~4095. By default, the port type is UNI.
9-2

In this example, the default port type UNI is used, so manual configuration is
unnecessary.
4)
Create PVP between the AIU optical port (0/2/0) to the MMXC optical port (0/7/8)
to access the traffic from MA5100-B.
MA5100 (config)#pvp
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:1
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:1
{ upc<K> }:upc
Create PVP successfully! Connection ID = 0
5)
Set the operation mode of the LAND board.
MA5100 (config-if-lan-0/2)#operation-mode ipdslam
6)
Create the PVC between the AIU optical port and the LAND VLAN (2k VLAN) to
access the traffic from MA5100-B.
MA5100 (config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<K>|atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ atm<K>|vci<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:50
{ atm<K>|e3<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|lan<K>|
fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:lan
{ frame/slot<S><3,4> }:0/2
{ vlan<K> }:vlan
9-3

{ vlan<1,4095> }:1
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
III. Configuring MA5100-B and MA5100-C

Since the service configuration of the remote MA5100 is the same as that of a common
MA5100, it is not described here.
9.2 Remote Cascading Using the IMA Subboard

Through the IMA port on the IMA subboard (E8IT), the MA5100 in the office end
connects to multiple MA5100s in the remote end in a point-to-point star topology. The
remote MA5100s can access ADSL, CES, FR or LAN users.
See Chapter 10 Configuring IMA Service in this module for more details about the
networking and the data configuration.
9.3 Remote Cascading Using the E3 Subboard

Through the E3 port on the E3 subboard (E13T or E23T) attached to the AIU board, the
MA5100 in the office end connects to multiple MA5100s in the remote end in a
point-to-point star topology. The remote MA5100s can access ADSL, CES, FR or LAN
users.
9-4

ATM
ATM 155M
MA5100-A
A
D
L
E
A
I
U
A
M
M
X
C
E3
VPI/VCI : 0/60
MA5100-B
A
D
L
E
M
M
X
C
Figure 9-2 Networking for remote cascading using the E3 subboard

In the networking diagram, the E3 port on the MMX board of MA5100-B connects
upstream to the E3 port on the AIU board of MA5100-A. Through the PVC established
between the E3 port on MA5100-As AIU board and MA5100-Bs ATM optical port on
the MMXC board, MA5100-A can access the traffic from MA5100-B to the ATM
network.
II. Configuring MA5100-A

1)
Enter the E3 configuration mode.
MA5100 (config)#interface aiu 0/4

MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4)#
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4)#sub-interface
{ ima<K>|electric<K>|optic<K>|e3<K> }:e3
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#
2)
Set the port line type.
The command linetype is used to set the port line type. The available port line types
are: e3other, e3framed and e3plcp, and the default line type is e3framed.
The following example shows how to set the port line type to e3plcp:
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#linetype
{ portId<0,3> }:0
{ linetype<E><e3other,e3Framed,e3Plcp> }:e3plcp
In this example, the default line type e3framed is applied, so no manual setting is
necessary.
3)
Set the port transmit clock.
9-5

The command tx clock is used to set the port transmit clock. The available clock types
are system and line, and the default clock type is system.
The following example shows how to set the transmit type clock of port 0 as line.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#tx clock
{ portId<0,3> }:0
{ clocktype<E><system,line> }: line
In this example, the default clock type system is applied, so no manual setting is
necessary.
4)
Set the port type.
Two port types are available: UNI and NNI. The command uni-nni-set is used to set
the port type. When the UNI port type is used, the VPI value ranges 0~255; when the
NNI port type is used, the VPI value ranges 0~4095. By default, the port type is UNI.
The following example shows how to set the port type of port 0 as NNI.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#uni-nni-set
{ port<0,3> }:0
{ uni<K>|nni<K> }:nni
In this example, the default port type UNI is used, so no manual setting is necessary.
5)
Set the maximum number of VPIs for the VC.
By default, up to 16 VPIs are allowed for the VC on a port. The command show
resource can be used to query the available VP scope and VC scope of a certain port.
The following example shows how to display the available VP scope and VC scope of a
port 0.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#show resource 0
The total VPIs supported by the port
= 256
The number of available VPIs of VC connection supported by the port = 16

Max VP connection support on this port
= 240
Max VC connection support on this port
= 15872
Available VPI scope {0,255}

Available VCI scope {32,1023}
The port is configured as UNI
Rate of relay port 34010 Kbps
In some special networking applications, the actual VC scope of an E3 port may

exceed the available VC scope (32~1023). In that case, you can manage to extend the
available VC scope by decreasing the maximum number of VPIs of the VC.
The command vpi-num-for-vcc is used to set the maximum number of VPIs of the VC.
Note that the maximum number of VPIs must be a power product of 2.
9-6

The following example shows how to set the maximum number of VPIs for the VC of
port 0 as 4.
MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#vpi-num-for-vcc
{ port<0,3> }:0
{ vpi-num<1,256> }:4
where the modified available VP scope and VC scope will be displayed:

MA5100 (config-if-aiu-0/4.e3)#show resource 0
The total VPIs supported by the port
= 256
The number of available VPIs of VC connection supported by the port = 4

Max VP connection support on this port
= 252
Max VC connection support on this port
= 16256
Available VPI scope {0,255}

Available VCI scope {32,4095}
The port is configured as UNI
Rate of relay port 34010 Kbps
Since the values taken in this example (VPI/VCI=0/60) are within the available scopes,
modification is unnecessary.
6)
Create PVC between the E3 port (port 0) on MA5100As AIU board and the ATM
port (0/7/8) on MA5100-Bs MMXC board.
MA5100 (config)#pvc
lan<K>|fr<K>|shdsl<K> }:e3
{ vpi<K>|e3<K>|atm<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vpi
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ e3<K>|vci<K>|atm<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|
lan<K>|fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:vci
{ vci<32,65535> }:60
{ e3<K>|atm<K>|adsl<K>|ces-uni<K>|ces-sdt<K>|ces-v35<K>|ces-udt<K>|lan<K>|
fr<K>|ima<K>|shdsl<K> }:atm
{ vpi<0,4095> }:3
{ vci<32,65535> }:60
{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
9-7

{ index<0,511> }:2
{ upc<K> }:upc
III. Configuring MA5100-B

Since the service configuration of the remote MA5100 is the same as that of a common
MA5100, it is not described here.
9-8
HUAWEI

Module
Operation Manual
Part 3 Maintenance Operation
Operation Manual Maintenance Operation

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Backup and Loading ................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Backup ............................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 Backing up Data to Designated Device .................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Upgrading the Backed up Data ............................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Loading .............................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.3.1 Loading the Service Board Programs ..................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Loading the MMXC Program................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.3 Loading the Data ................................................................................................... 1-13
1.3.4 Loading Language Files........................................................................................ 1-14
1.3.5 Confirming the Loading ......................................................................................... 1-14
1.3.6 Loading other Files and Programs ........................................................................ 1-14
Chapter 2 Active/Standby Switchover......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 Basic Concepts ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Modes of Active/Standby Switchover...................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Requirements on Environment for Switchover .................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Requirements on Hardware and Software.............................................................. 2-3
2.2.2 Restrictions on Networking ..................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Performing the Active/Standby Switchover ....................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Different Situations for the Switchover .................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Switching between Active and Standby MMXCs .................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Switching the Active and Standby SEPA Boards.................................................... 2-7
Chapter 3 Alarm Management...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Alarm ID ............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Alarm ID .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Setting Alarm Level............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.2 Setting Alarm Level ................................................................................................. 3-4
3.3 Enabling or Disabling CLI Output ...................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.2 Enabling or Disabling CLI Output............................................................................ 3-5
3.4 Enabling or Disabling Alarm Statistics............................................................................... 3-7
3.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4.2 Enabling or Disabling Alarm Statistics .................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Setting Alarm Threshold .................................................................................................... 3-9
i

Table of Contents
3.6 Displaying Alarm Statistics ................................................................................................ 3-9

3.7 Clearing Alarm Statistics.................................................................................................. 3-10
3.8 Displaying Alarm Basic Information ................................................................................. 3-10
3.9 Displaying Alarm History.................................................................................................. 3-11
Chapter 4 Operation And Maintenance ....................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Configuring OAM ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Configuring OAM Attributes for a CP ...................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Configuring the CC Function................................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 Setting CP Loopback .............................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.4 Inserting AIS/RID/CC Cells ..................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 Displaying Statistics........................................................................................................... 4-8
Chapter 5 Configuring EMU ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Configuration Procedures .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.3 Defining an EMU in Global Configuration Mode................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 Adding/Deleting/Displaying an EMU ....................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Entering the EMU Configuration Mode ................................................................... 5-4
5.4 Configuring EMU-H303ESC .............................................................................................. 5-4
5.4.1 Configuring H303ESC Environment Monitoring Parameter.................................... 5-4
5.4.2 Displaying H303ESC Environment Information ...................................................... 5-5
5.5 Configuring EMU-FAN ....................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5.1 Configuring FAN Parameters .................................................................................. 5-6
5.5.2 Displaying the Information Reported by EMU-FAN ................................................ 5-7
5.6 Configuring EMU-POWER 4875/4845 .............................................................................. 5-7
5.6.1 Configuring POWER4875/4845 .............................................................................. 5-7
5.6.2 Displaying Various Information of POWER4875/4845............................................ 5-9
5.7 Configuring EMU-DIS ...................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.1 Configuring DIS Parameters ................................................................................. 5-10
5.7.2 Displaying DIS Information.................................................................................... 5-10
ii

Chapter 1 Backup and Loading

1.1 Overview
The MA5100 is able to duplicate its system data stored in the Flash memory to another
device, in order to save your effort to configure this part of data when you upgrade the
MA5100 system. The following procedures are involved in this part of operation.
1)
First, back up the system data stored in the Flash memory of the MMXC to another
device, such as to a PC.
2)
If no upgrading is involved, just load the program and then the backed up data to
the MA5100;
3)
If upgrading is involved, first upgrade the data stored in the PC by using the
upgrade tool, and then load the new program and the upgraded data to the
MA5100.
Table 1-1 lists the commands for the backup and loading.
Table 1-1 Commands for backing up and loading program and data
Operation
Command
Mode
Backing up the data stored in the Flash

memory
backup
Privileged, global configuration mode
Loading program or data
load
Privileged mode, global configuration

mode
1.2 Backup
1.2.1 Backing up Data to Designated Device
The command backup is used to duplicate the system data, program, and the
language files to a designated device. The backup can be made through either the
serial port (CON), or the Ethernet port (ETH).
I. Backup through serial port

1)
Enter the following command in the HyperTerminal.
MA5100#backup data xmodem
1-1

The system displays the baudrate, and prompts that you can change the baudrate for
the backup.
Current baud rate is 115200bps, and it can be modified via 'baudrate' command
Are you sure to use this baud rate? (y/n)[n]:y
Note:
You are recommended to set the baudrate of the serial port to 115200 bit/s to facilitate the backup. You
need to modify the baudrate on both the serial port of the maintenance terminal and the MA5100 serial
port.
The system prompts the following:

Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of
progress
Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure
and unpredictable result
Please select the menu [Transmit\Receive File] to begin receiving file
Or press any key to exit..
2)
In the HyperTerminal window, select [Transfer/Receive file], and then the following
dialog box appears:
Figure 1-1 Using HyperTerminal to receive file

3)
Input or select the directory of the file to be backed up, select Xmodem for the
transmission, then click <Receive>, and the following dialog box appears:
1-2

Figure 1-2 Inputting the file name

4)
Specify the name of the file (such as 20031215MMX.dat) in the dialog box as
shown below:
5)
Input the file name in the dialog box, and then click <OK>.
The system starts to back up the data. The progress is displayed when the system
isbacking up the file. For example:
Figure 1-3 Interface that displays the backup progress

After the backup, the following prompt will appear:
ALARM 221 EVENT MAJOR 0x0b20000b ----- 2003-08-20 12:15:52
ALARM NAME
: Backup complete
PARAMETERS
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 7, Backup type: Host data
DESCRIPTION : Backup files successfully to maintenance terminal

CAUSE
: Backup complete
ADVICE
: No need to proceed
--- END
1-3

Now the backup of data is finished.
II. Backup through Ethernet port

1)
Make sure that the TFTP server is connected to the MA5100 correctly, and you
can ping the ETH port on the MA5100 MMX successfully from the PC that runs the
TFTP program.
2)
Run the TFTP program.
Figure 1-4 Interface for running TFTP program

3)
Click <Settings> to select the directory that stores the file to be backed up.
Figure 1-5 Setting the base directory of the file to be backed up

4)
Click <OK> to confirm.
5)
Execute the backup command. For example:
MA5100#backup data
{ xmodem<K>|tftp<K> }:tftp
{ ServerIpAddress }:10.71.55.227
1-4

{ filename<S><1,80> }:20031213MMX.dat
Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress
Any
operation
such
as
reboot
or
switchover
will
cause
failure
and
unpredictable result
! 1[2003-08-20 14:46:42]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 224 EVENT MAJOR 0x0b20000a ----- 2003-08-20 14:46:42
ALARM NAME
: Backup start
PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION : Start to backup files from the host to maintenance terminal

CAUSE
: Backup start
ADVICE
--- END
If your input is incorrect, or the TFTP connection is abnormal, an error prompt will
appear.
If everything goes correctly, the backup will start. For example:
MA5100#
! 1[2003-08-20 14:48:06]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 225 EVENT MAJOR 0x0b20000b ----- 2003-08-20 14:48:06
ALARM NAME
: Backup complete
PARAMETERS
DESCRIPTION : Backup files successfully to maintenance terminal

CAUSE
: Backup complete
ADVICE
--- END.
In the backup process, you can use the command show progress backup to display
the progress.
1.2.2 Upgrading the Backed up Data

The upgrading of backed up data is implemented in the Command Prompt window by
using the database upgrade tool.
The basic procedures for upgrading lower-version data to higher-version data are as
follows:
1)
Use the command backup data to back up data of the current version with the file
name old.dat.
2)
Copy the database description files (*.ini) of the current version and the version to
be loaded as well as the dbupdate file to the same directory with old.dat.
3)
Rename the database description files (*.ini) of the current version and the version
to be loaded as old.ini and new.ini respectively.
1-5

4)
Select [Start/Run], and input command into the dialogue box that appears. Click
<OK>, and then operate in the dialogue box.
5)
Enter the directory where the dbupdate file is stored, and execute the command
dbupdate as follows:
DbUpdate
old.ini
new.ini
old.dat
new.dat
Where:
z
old.ini: database description file in the original MA5100 system;
new.ini: database description file in the new MA5100 system;
old.dat: data that are backed up from the MA5100 system;
new.dat: backup data that have been upgraded.
Note:
You are recommended to put the files old.ini, new.ini, old.dat and the upgrade tool in the same directory.
6)
The file new.dat is the upgraded database file that shall be loaded to the
upgraded MA5100 system.
1.3 Loading
The loading may include that of the service board program, MMXC program, database,
language files and other files and data.
Both the programs and the data can be loaded through TFTP and Xmodem protocols.
However, you are recommended to load programs by using TFTP protocol to save
time.
Caution:
To ensure successful upgrade of the service boards, the service board programs must be loaded before
the MMXC program is loaded.
1.3.1 Loading the Service Board Programs

The following describes the loading of the SLC program as an example.
1)
Activate the SHLA and make sure it is in normal state.
2)
Run the TFTP program and set the directory that stores the new SHLA program.
1-6

3)
Run the load command (assume the IP address of the TFTP server is
10.71.55.227, the program to be loaded is H511 H511SLC.bin, and the SLC board
to be upgraded is in Slot 10 of frame 0):
MA5100#load program
{ frameid<0,4>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/10
Whether to load other boards of same type ? (y/n):[n]
Board name[H511SLCB]:
File name [H511SLC.bin]:
Service board will automatically restart after successful loading
And the corresponding service will be terminated for a short while
Whether to start loading? (y/n)[n]:y
progress
! 1[2003-08-21 09:42:48]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 251 EVENT MAJOR 0x0b200001 ----- 2003-08-21 09:42:48

ALARM NAME
: Load start
PARAMETERS
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 10, Load type: Board program
DESCRIPTION : Load start

CAUSE
: Load start
ADVICE
--- END
In the loading process, you can use the command show progress load to display the
loading progress.
After the loading is completed, alarm information will appear, for example:
! 1[2003-08-21 09:47:54]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 256 RECOVERY MAJOR 0x02320000 EQUIPMENT 2003-08-21 09:47:54

ALARM NAME
: Board recovery alarm
PARAMETERS
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 10, Name: H511SLCB
DESCRIPTION : Board recovery alarm

CAUSE
: Communication with the main control board recovered
ADVICE
--- END
After the loading succeeds, the board will be reset automatically. The board shall be
able to register automatically if it is compatible with the MMXC program.
4)
Use the command show board to display the board status.

1-7

5)
Use the command show version to display the version information of the board
program to judge whether the version is correct.
1.3.2 Loading the MMXC Program

The MMXC program can be loaded by using the command load program while the
MA5100 system is running, or loaded in BIOS process.
I. Load the MMXC program through command

The following takes loading of the MMXC program through TFTP as an example.
Assume the IP address of the TFTP server is 10.71.55.227, and the name of the
program file to be loaded is rom_mmx.arj.
1)
Make sure the TFTP server is connected correctly with the MA5100, run the TFTP
program, and set correctly the path for the directory that stores the program file.
2)
Input the following command from the command line terminal:
MA5100#load program tftp 10.71.55.227

{ frameid<0,8>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/7Board name[H511MMXC]:
File name [rom_mmx.arj]:
After loading host program, the corresponding database should be loaded
Rollback function will be disabled
Be sure that the system needn't this function
Are you sure to load host program? (y/n)[n]:y
progress
If the input is correct, and the TFTP connection is correct, the following will appear:
ALARM NAME
: Load start
PARAMETERS
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 7, Load type: Host program
DESCRIPTION : Load start

CAUSE
: Load start
ADVICE
: Not need to process
--- END
! 1[2003-07-29 10:27:06]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:

ALARM NAME
: Load complete
PARAMETERS
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 7, Load type: Host program
DESCRIPTION : Load complete
1-8

CAUSE
: Load complete
ADVICE
: Not need to process
--- END
The above information shows that the MMXC program has been loaded to the Flash
memory of the MMXC board successfully.
II. Load MMXC program through BIOS
Caution:
If you use the BIOS loading method, the system must be restarted and all the services will be interrupted.
The loading procedures are as follows:

1)
Connect the serial port of the maintenance terminal with the CON port on the
MMXC, and connect the network interface of the maintenance terminal to the ETH
port on the MMXC using a crossover cable.
2)
Set the HyperTerminal properties of the maintenance terminal.
The settings are: [Bits per second]: 9600, [Data bits]: 8, [Parity]: None, [Stop bits]: 1,
[Flow control]: None.
1-9

Figure 1-6 Setting the properties of Console port

3)
After the setting, select [Call/Disconnect], and then [Call/Call] in the HyperTerminal
window to validate the new settings.
4)
Run TFTP32 program and set the base directory of the MMXC program, for
example:
Figure 1-7 Setting TFTP32
1-10

5)
Reset the MMXC board, and then operate according to the prompt given on the
maintenance terminal.
_/_/
_/_/
_/_/
_/ _/_/ _/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/
_/_/_/
Copyright (c) 1999 - 2002 by Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd.

All Rights Reserved.
The last update date of base BIOS is : Feb 14 2003
===============================================================
BOARD INFORMATION :
MPC860 (Rev E.2) CPU running at 50Mhz
64M bytes SDRAM, 32M bytes flash memory installed on board
Baudrate of serial channel is 9600bps
IP address of ethernet is 10.71.55.155
Subnet mask of ethernet is 255.0.0.0
Default gateway of ethernet is 0.0.0.0
Board's ethernet hardware address is 00:E0:FC:22:33:44
===============================================================
Base BIOS version is 400
Save extended BIOS disable start flag...OK!
System is booting from extended BIOS...
The last update date of extended BIOS is : Jul
Extended BIOS version is 502
Press any key to stop auto-boot... 7
Main
Menu
==============================================
1. Boot from flash
2. Boot from serial port by Xmodem
3. Boot from ethernet port by TFTP
Please enter a choice : 3
1-11
2 2003

Submenu For TFTP

==============================================
0. Back to main menu
1. Download program & data to SDRAM then boot //Load the program and data
directly to SDRAM, without saving in the Flash. This is only used in debugging.
2. Download program & data to flash then boot //Load the program and data to
the Flash to boot the system.
3. Only download data to flash then boot //Load the data to the Flash to boot
the system.
Please enter a choice : 2
Board IP address
: [10.71.55.155]
//IP address of the MA5100 port ETH.
Board Mask address : [255.0.0.0]
Host IP address
: [10.11.104.1] 10.71.55.227. //IP address of the host that
loads the program and data.
Download filename
: [rom_mmx.arj]
You will download file 'rom_mmx.arj' from TFTP server 10.71.55.227
Are you sure?(y/n) : [y]
Downloading file, please wait...download 3342080 bytes OK!
Do you want to download data?(y/n) : [y] y
Please input the filename to be downloaded : [db_mmx.dat]
You will download file 'db_mmx.dat' from TFTP server 10.71.55.227
Are you sure?(y/n) : [y] y
Downloading file, please wait...download 2073135 bytes OK!
Begin to check download program...OK!
Begin to check download data...OK!
Initialize program status in flash...OK!
1-12

Initialize data status in flash...OK!
Begin to save program in main area...100%
Begin to save program in spare area...100%
Begin to expand program................................OK!
Begin to save data in main area...100%
Begin to save data in spare area...100%
Save extended BIOS enable start flag...OK!
Transferring control to the loaded program...OK!
Starting system configuration data init...successfully!
Starting PVC configuration data init........successfully!
Huawei MA5100 Multi-service Access Module.

Copyright(C) 1998-2003 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
>>User name:
Note:
In BIOS loading mode, you can also choose to load the data at the same time.
The language file shall be loaded and upgraded after the MA5100 has been started.
1.3.3 Loading the Data

The command load data is used to load the new database after the MMXC program
has been loaded. For example:
MA5100#load data
{ filename<S><1,80> }:db_mmx.dat
{ Options<E><active,standby> }:active
1-13

After the loading, press the reset button on the MMXC or execute the command reboot
to restart the MA5100, and the loaded program and data will start running.
Log in to the MA5100 and use the command show version to confirm that the correct
program has been loaded.
1.3.4 Loading Language Files

The default language for current MMXC program is English. You can use the command
load language to load the language file.
MA5100#load language general
{ filename<S><1,80> }:infoeng.res
1.3.5 Confirming the Loading

After the successful loading, all the boards shall register and run normally.
The command show board is used to display the status of the boards, while the
command show version is used to display version information of the boards.
1.3.6 Loading other Files and Programs

Other files and programs include the BIOS and CPLD files, as well as the patch
programs.
I. Load BIOS file

The command load bios is used to load the BIOS files when the system is upgraded
through BIOS mode. There are two types of BIOS files: basic BIOS files and extended
BIOS files. The following introduces the loading of extended BIOS files.
MA5100#load bios
{ base<K>|extend<K> }:extend
{ frameid<0,4>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/7
Board name[H511MMXC]:
File name [H511MMXC.bos]:
Whether to start loading? (y/n)[n]:y
progress
1-14

Any
operation
such
as
reboot

or
switchover
will
cause
failure
and
Caution:
To validate the BIOS file, the MA5100 must be restarted after the successful loading.
II. Load CPLD file

The command load cpld is used to load the logic file CPLD.
MA5100#load cpld
{ frameid<0,4>|F/S<S><3,15> }:0/7
Board name[H511MMXC]:
File name [H511MMXC.cpd]:
Loading host CPLD logic will cause system reboot
Are you sure to load CPLD logic? (y/n)[n]:y
progress
Caution:
To validate the CPLD file, the MA5100 must be restarted after the successful loading.
III. Load the patch program

The command load patch is used to load the patch program.
MA5100#load patch
{ filename<S><1,80> }:B03D031SP01
1-15


progress
Any
operation
such
as
reboot
or
switchover
Caution:
After the patch program has been loaded successfully, you must:
z
Use the command patch activate to activate the patch program.
Use the command patch run to run the patch program.
1-16
will
cause
failure
and

Chapter 2 Active/Standby Switchover

2.1 Overview
As a carrier-class device, the MA5100 features high reliability and error tolerance. Its
MMXC and SEPA boards work in active/standby mode. When the active board fails, the
standby board will switch to active state automatically, so that the service will not be
interrupted.
Note:
The MA5103 does not support the active/standby switchover.
2.1.1 Basic Concepts

In the active/standby switchover, there are two key processes: data synchronization
and smoothing. The data must be synchronized completely, and the smoothing must be
correct, otherwise the switchover will not be performed successfully.
I. Data synchronization
The MA5100 adopts centralized data synchronization, in which the data
synchronization module provides the interface for the software modules to register the
data to be synchronized, and completes the synchronization.
These types of data can be synchronized on the module: configuration data, basic
running data and dynamic service data.
z
Configuration data type: Including the static database table, static data of the
application modules and user-configured data;
Basic running data type: Including the status data, such as the changes of system
state (board failure or change of connection state), alarm and operation log;
Dynamic service data type: Including the narrow-band service data, such as the
data change that is caused by call services (such as V5 call and PPP dialing); The
MA5100 does not support narrow-band services at present, and synchronization
of this type of data is not considered now.
Data synchronization is made following a certain procedures. The configuration data is

firstly synchronized, then the basic running data, and finally the dynamic service data.
2-1

The states of data synchronization can be complete or incomplete.

z
Complete data synchronization: All the data on the active board are synchronized
to the standby board;
Incomplete data synchronization: Not all the data on the active board are
synchronized to the standby board.
II. Smoothing
When active/standby switchover occurs, the standby board changes to the active one.
Before this happens, a series of actions will be taken, including the consistency check
on the synchronized data, and re-generation of data. All these actions are called
smoothing.
2.1.2 Modes of Active/Standby Switchover

The active/standby switchover can be automatic or manual.
I. Automatic switchover
When the active board fails, the board resets, and the standby board changes into the
active one automatically.
II. Manual switchover

There are several methods to implement manual switchover:
z
Running the switchover command;
Resetting the active board;
Pressing the reset button or unplug the active board from the slot.
According to different states of synchronization, the switchover can be normal

switchover or forced switchover.
z
Normal switchover: When the switchover takes place after complete data
synchronization, it is called normal switchover; Normal switchover does not
interrupt online services, nor cause abnormal breakdown of links or reset on the
board;
Forced switchover: When the switchover takes place after incomplete data
synchronization, it is called forced switchover; Incomplete synchronization
concerns that of configuration data, basic data and dynamic service data. When
the switchover takes place with incomplete synchronization of different types of
data, the process and result on the switchover are different.
When the configuration data is not completely synchronized, the switchover command
cannot be used for forced switchover. In this case, if you switch over the boards through
other methods, such as resetting the active board, pressing the reset button or
unplugging the active board, the system will restart, but the basic data may get lost. So
2-2

the switchover is not needed here. The board is reset so that it can be restored in a
short time.
When the basic running data is not completely synchronized, the switchover command
cannot be used for forced switchover. When you use other manual methods to switch
over the boards, the system will not reset, and the database will not be affected. But the
service boards may get reset.
The switchover command is allowed when some of the dynamic service data are
synchronized incompletely. The switchover does not affect the service, and all the
connections, alarm and logs will not get lost.
2.2 Requirements on Environment for Switchover

2.2.1 Requirements on Hardware and Software
To implement active/standby switchover, the following are required.
z
Both the active and standby MMXC boards have the same hardware version, and
both are working normally;
Any subboards on the active and standby MMXCs must have the same type and
version;
Both the active and standby MMXC must use the same clock; That is to say, if the
active MMXC uses the system clock, the standby MMXC must also use the
system clock; if the active MMXC is configured with a clock subboard, the standby
MMXC must also have a clock subboard, and the version of the subboards must
be the same;
Versions of the program, data and language files must be consistent.
The above requirements are not necessary on the service boards.
2.2.2 Restrictions on Networking

To implement active/standby switchover, there are some restrictions on the networking:
z
Uplink through MMXC optical interface is unavailable in active/standby switchover,

in this case, AIU board is used instead to provide optical uplink interface;
When the outband network management is used, both ETH ports on the active
and standby MMXC must be connected to the management network; After
complete data synchronization, the IP address of the standby MMXC shall be
consistent with that of the active MMXC (MAC address is not synchronized). The
ETH port of the standby MMXC shall be deactivated at this time, and become
activated only when it is switched to active state.
You cannot use inband NMS to log in to the standby MMXC. In this case, log in to
the active MMXC through the serial port on the board. When the standby MMXC is
2-3

working normally, it is also available to log in to the active MMXC through the serial
port on the standby MXMC.
2.3 Performing the Active/Standby Switchover

There are several methods to operate the active/standby switchover: reset the active
MMXC, unplug the MMXC, or run the switchover command. This part describes the
procedures to switch over the active/standby boards through command line.
When you implement the switchover through the command line interface, the system
shall first check the state of the standby MMXC and the consistency of
hardware/software versions of the active/standby MMXC, as well as the data
synchronization state. The consistency check must be successful before the
switchover is implemented.
2.3.1 Different Situations for the Switchover

After the switchover command has been issued, the system shall judge whether to
execute the command according to the following situations:
1)
The standby board is not in position, or is faulty;
2)
The clock subboard on the standby board is not working normally;
3)
The type and data on the service subboards of the active and standby MMXCs are
inconsistent;
4)
The data synchronization switch is OFF (default is ON when the system starts);
5)
The software versions of the active and standby MMXCs are inconsistent;
6)
The version of data and program on the standby MMXC are inconsistent, or the
database file of the standby MMXC has been damaged;
7)
The system is currently operating on the FLASH, such as loading, duplicating,

backing up or saving the data or program;
8)
The patches and patch states are inconsistent;
9)
Basic data and service data have not been synchronized completely;
10) Dynamic service data have not been synchronized completely;

11) All the data have been synchronized completely.
If you attempt to switch over the boards when any one from the first nine situations
exists, the command will be rejected, and you will see the corresponding prompt.
In case the switchover occurs when the software versions of the active and standby
boards are inconsistent, the following will prompt:
Software versions of active and standby boards are inconsistent, this command
will cause the reboot of system,
The standby board will be the new active board and the rebooted system will
use its configuration data, are you sure to continue?(y/n)[n]:
2-4

In cast the switchover occurs when the patch versions of the active and standby boards
are inconsistent, the following prompt will appear:
Patch files of active board and standby board are inconsistent, some function
in system may be abnormal if switchover happened. Please confirm the patch
file's difference between main control boards, then decide to delete/reload
the patch. Will you continue the switchover now? (y/n)[n]:
In the tenth situation, in which the dynamic service data have not been synchronized
completely, the switchover will affect the services to be connected, while the online
services are not interrupted. A prompt will be given for your decision.
In the last situation, in which all the data have been synchronized completely, the
switchover will take place immediately after the command has been issued, and the
active board will be reset.
2.3.2 Switching between Active and Standby MMXCs

I. Show the board states
Use the command show board to display the board states. The following table lists the
states of active/standby MMXCs.
Operation
Active MMXC
Standby MMXC
Normal
Active _ normal
Standby_ normal
Communication between active/standby MMXCs

fail
Active _ normal
Standby_ fail
Standby MMXC not in position
Active _ normal
--------------------------------------------------------------SlotID
BoardName Status
SubType1
SubType2
--------------------------------------------------------------0
1
H511AIUA
Normal
O2CTG
H511ADLD
Failed
H511MMXC
Active_normal
H511MMXC
Standby_normal
H511ADLC
Normal
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
2-5
O2CTG

11
12
13
14
H511ADLD
Prohibited
15
---------------------------------------------------------------
II. Show the state of data synchronization

Use the command show data sync state to display the data synchronization state.
MA5100#show data sync state
All of configuration data (such as data originated from user configuration)
synchronizes completely
All of basic operation data (such as device status data, operation log and
alarm, etc.) synchronizes completely
All of dynamic service data (data realtimely changing such as PSTN call data
and PPPOE call data,etc.) synchronizes completely
User configuration data CRC check values of active and standby boards are
consistent
III. Show the state of data synchronization switch

Use the command show sync switch state to see whether the switch is on or off.
When the switch is off, no switchover operation is allowed.
MA5100#show sync-switch state
Data synchronization switch status: On
IV. Enable/disable the data synchronization switch

Use the command (no) standby auto-sync configure to enable or disable the switch.
MA5100#standby auto-sync configure
Data synchronization switch status: On
V. Run the MMXC switchover command

Use the command system switch-over to start the switchover. If the system judges
that current situation does not allow the switchover, the command will be rejected. If the
dynamic service data have not been synchronized completely, the system shall prompt
you to decide whether to go on with the switchover. If the data synchronization has
been completed, the switchover will be performed immediately.
MA5100(config)#system switch-over
Are you sure to switch over? (y/n)[n]: y
2-6

VI. Switchover through resetting the active MMXC

The command reboot is used to restart the active MMXC board, so as to switch over
between the active and standby MMXCs. The following is an example:
MA5100#reboot
{ Options<E><system,active,standby> }:active
Data is not saved, the unsaved data may lose if reboot active board, are you
sure to reboot active board? (y/n)[n]:y
2.3.3 Switching the Active and Standby SEPA Boards

I. Display the board state
MA5100(config)#show board
{ frameid[/slotid]<S><1,5> }:0
-----------------------------------------------------------------SlotID
BoardName
Status
Sub0
Sub1
Sub2
Sub3
-----------------------------------------------------------------0
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511MMXC
Active_normal
H511MMXC
Standby_normal
10
H511AIUA
Normal
O2CTG
11
H511FRCA
Normal
E1_FR
12
H512LANC
Normal
13
H512LANC
Normal
14
H511SEPA
Standby_normal
15
H511SEPA
Active_normal
5
6
--------------------------------------------------------
II. Switch the boards

The command sep switch-over is used to switch over between the active and standby
SEP boards.
MA5100(config)#sep switch-over
2-7

Are you sure to switch over sep board? (y/n)[n]:y

Sep switch-over success
MA5100(config)#
! 1[2003-07-07 15:15:53]:ALM-3-AlarmInfo:
ALARM 94392 INFO MAJOR 0x02300036 ----- 2003-07-07 15:15:53

ALARM NAME
: Sep board switch success
PARAS INFO
: FrameID: 0, SlotID: 14 ,Master and slave information now: 1
(
0:master,1:slave)
DESCRIPTION : Sep board switch success
REASON
: sep board switch
ADVICE
: no process
--- END
III. Display the result of switchover

MA5100(config)#show board
{ frameid[/slotid]<S><1,5> }:0
-----------------------------------------------------------------SlotID
BoardName
Status
Sub0
Sub1
Sub2
Sub3
-----------------------------------------------------------------0
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511ADLE
Normal
H511MMXC
Active_normal
H511MMXC
Standby_normal
10
H511AIUA
Normal
O2CTG
11
H511FRCA
Normal
E1_FR
12
H512LANC
Normal
13
H512LANC
Normal
14
H511SEPA
Active_normal
15
H511SEPA
Standby_normal
5
6
--------------------------------------------------------
2-8

Chapter 3 Alarm Management

The MA5100 defines a series of alarms. Each alarm contains the configuration
information such as alarm level, CLI output ID, NM output ID, 15-minute threshold, and
24-hour threshold. All of the alarms have their default values upon the initial startup of
the MA5100. You can use the commands listed in the Table 3-1 to change the alarm
configurations. The new value will become effective immediately after it has been set,
and remains valid after the system is restarted.
Table 3-1 Alarm configuration commands
Operation
Command
Command mode
Setting alarm level
alarm alarmlevel
Privileged mode
Enabling or disabling alarm output
alarm output
Privileged mode
Enabling or disabling alarm statistics switch
alarm statistics
Privileged mode
Enabling or disabling alarm statistics
alarm threshold
Privileged mode
Displaying the alarm configuration
show alarm configuration
User EXEC mode
Displaying history alarms
show alarm history
User EXEC mode
Displaying alarm list
show alarm list
User EXEC mode
Displaying the alarm statistics
show alarm statistics
User EXEC mode
3.1 Alarm ID
3.1.1 Overview
Alarm information may come from various modules in the MA5100, or various service
boards. Alarm ID is unique. It can be allocated by the board type or alarm type.
3.1.2 Alarm ID
An alarm ID contains eight octets that are divided into four groups, as show below.
3-1

0x A A B C D D D D
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
The first group represents the alarm module ID;
The second group represents the alarm category;
The third group represents the alarm type;
The forth group represents the alarm serial number.
Table 3-2 shows the meanings of the alarm module IDs.

Table 3-2 Meanings of the alarm module ID
Alarm module ID
Name
Meaning
0x00
ALM
Alarm module
0x01
DB
Database
0x02
DEV
Device
0x05
NETTOPO
Network topology
0x07
SYN
Synchronization
0x08
CM
Connection
0x09
PAT
Patch
0x0a
PM
Port
0x0b
LOAD
Loading
0x0e
SYS
System
0x0f
SRVCTVL
Service control module
0x11
AIU
IMA alarm
0x15
EMM
EMM
0x16
SNMP
Network management
Table 3-3 shows the meanings of alarm categories.

Table 3-3 Meanings of alarm categories
Alarm category
Meaning
Communication
Service quality
Process error
3-2

Alarm category
Meaning
Equipment
Environment
Table 3-4 shows the meanings of alarm types.

Table 3-4 Meanings of alarm types
Alarm type
Meaning
Operation information
Fault alarm
Recover alarm
3.2 Setting Alarm Level

3.2.1 Overview
Alarm level indicates the severity level of an alarm. In terms of decreasing order, alarm
levels are divided into critical alarm, major alarm, minor alarm and warning.
z
Critical alarm refers to the alarm which endangers the MA5100 normal operation
and requires immediate troubleshooting, such as power circuit failure and output
clock failure.
Major alarm refers to the alarm generated in certain board or line, which may lead
to system abnormality if not processed in time, such as fiber broken, physical line
fault, etc. The major alarm may not be necessarily the serious incidental event, but
may also be generated in the normal manual operation.
Minor alarm refers to the general fault alarm or event alarm which describes
whether each board or line is normal, such as an alarm which indicates bit error in
a certain physical line.
Warning alarm refers to the status change and event, which will not affect the
system performance and the user service, but to which the operator may pay
attention.
Note:
Recovery alarm and fault alarm are of the same level.
3-3

The command show alarm list is used to display alarm configurations, including the
alarm ID, alarm type, alarm output control and alarm statistics control.
3.2.2 Setting Alarm Level

The command alarm alarmlevel is used to set an alarm level or restore to default level.
The following example shows how to change the alarm level of alarm 0x02320000 from
major to critical.
MA5100#alarm
{ alarmlevel<K>|threshold<K>|output<K>|statistics<K> }:alarmlevel
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x02320000
{ level<E><critical,major,minor,warn,default> }:critical
The command show alarm configuration is used to display the configuration.

MA5100#show alarm configuration
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x02320000
ALARMID: 0x02320000, NAME: Board restore

CLASS: RESTORE, TYPE: EQUIPMENT
LEVEL: CRITICAL, DEFAULT LEVEL: MAJOR
PARA NUMBER: 3
STATISTICS FLAG: NO
CLI_OUTPUT FLAG: YES
15Min THRESHOLD: 0, 24Hour THRESHOLD: 0
DESCRIPTION: Board restore
Note:
The recovery alarm corresponding to a fault alarm is set at the same level by the MA5100 automatically.
In the above example, the alarm level of alarm 0x02320000 has been changed to
critical, and you will see that its recovery alarm has been changed to critical as well.
MA5100#show alarm configuration 0x02310000
ALARMID: 0x02310000, NAME: Board fail
CLASS: FAULT, TYPE: EQUIPMENT
LEVEL: CRITICAL, DEFAULT LEVEL: MAJOR
PARA NUMBER: 3
STATISTICS FLAG: NO
3-4


DESCRIPTION: Board fail
It is recommended to set the alarm level with caution. Use the default alarm levels in
general cases. To recover to the default value after the alarm level has been modified,
use the keyword default in the command alarm. For example:
MA5100#alarm
{ alarmlevel<K>|threshold<K>|output<K>|statistics<K> }:alarmlevel
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x02320000
{ level<E><critical,major,minor,warn,default> }:default
The command show alarm configuration is used to display the configuration.
3.3 Enabling or Disabling CLI Output

3.3.1 Overview
By default, all alarms are output to all terminals, including NMS workstation and
command line terminal. As different users may care about different alarms, the MA5100
provides alarm filtering to set each type of alarms with an output flag to determine
whether the alarm shall be output to the command line terminal.
The MA5100 supports alarm filtering by alarm ID, board type or alarm level.
3.3.2 Enabling or Disabling CLI Output

The commands (no) alarm output are used to enable or disable the CLI output. The
following gives detailed procedures.
I. Enable CLI output by alarm ID

As the alarm ID is unique, this command can be used to enable CLI output for a specific
alarm. For example:
MA5100#alarm output
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|type<K>|all<K> }:alarmid
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x02320000
II. Enable CLI output by alarm level

Input the alarm level in the command, and the output will be determined by the level.
For example:
MA5100(config)#alarm output
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:alarmlevel
{ level<E><critical,major,minor,warn> }:critical
3-5

III. Enable CLI output by alarm category

The MA5100 alarms are divided into five categories: communication, service_quality,
process_error, equipment and environmental. Input the category name to control the
output of corresponding alarms. For example:
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:alarmtype
{ type_value<E><communication,service,process,equipment,environmental> }:s
ervice
IV. Output all alarms

The following example shows how to output all the alarms.
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:all
V. Display the configuration

The command show alarm configuration is used to display the alarm configuration,
including the alarm ID, alarm type, alarm level, default alarm level, whether alarm
statistics and CLI output is enabled or disabled, 15-minute threshold, and 24-hour
threshold.
MA5100#show alarm configuration
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x02320000
ALARMID: 0x02320000, NAME: Board restore

CLASS: RESTORE, TYPE: EQUIPMENT
LEVEL: MAJOR, DEFAULT LEVEL: MAJOR
PARA NUMBER: 3
STATISTICS FLAG: NO
DESCRIPTION: Board restore
3-6

Note:
z
The configuration is valid to all the command line terminals.
The alarm filtering function is invalid to the NMS.
Alarm output is irrelevant to the generation of alarm.
The alarm output status is determined by the latest configuration. Suppose an alarm is a major alarm
and a communication alarm as well. If the alarm output for major alarms is disabled, but enabled for
communication alarms, this alarm will be output.
The output ID of recovery alarm is the same as that of its corresponding fault alarm. The system
makes the output ID of a recovery alarm consistent with its corresponding alarm level, and vice versa.
3.4 Enabling or Disabling Alarm Statistics

3.4.1 Overview
Alarm statistics refers to the alarm counts in a time period. Based on the alarm
threshold, a threshold alarm will be generated when the alarm statistics exceed the
threshold.
The MA5100 makes alarm statistics every 15 minutes and every 24 hours.
Each alarm has a statistics flag, which indicates whether to collect alarm statistics or
not. By default, all alarm statistics are not collected.
Similar to the configuration of alarm output, you can enable alarm statistics by the alarm
ID, alarm level, or alarm type, and you can also enable statistics for all of the alarms.
3.4.2 Enabling or Disabling Alarm Statistics

The commands (no) alarm statistics are used to enable or disable the alarm statistics
function. The specific procedures are as follows.
I. Enable alarm statistics by alarm ID

As the alarm ID is unique, this command can be used to enable alarm statistics for a
specific alarm. For example:
MA5100#alarm statistics
alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:alarmid
{ id<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x0a100064
3-7

II. Enable alarm statistics by alarm level

Input the alarm level in the command, and the statistics will be based on the alarm level.
For example:
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:alarmlevel
III. Enable alarm statistics by alarm type

The MA5100 alarms are divided into five categories: communication, service_quality,
process_error, equipment and environmental. Input the category name to control the
statistics of corresponding alarms. For example:
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:alarmtype
{ type_value<E><communication,service,process,equipment,environmental> }:s
ervice
IV. Collect satistics for all alarms

The following example shows how to collect statistics for all the alarms.
{ alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|all<K> }:all
V. Display the configuration

The command show alarm configuration is used to display the configuration of the
alarm statistics flag.
Note:
z
The alarm statistics configuration is determined by the result of the latest operation. Suppose an alarm
is a major alarm and a communication alarm as well. If the alarm statistics for major alarms is disabled,
but enabled for communication alarms, the alarm statistics of this alarm in question is enabled.
The statistics flag of the fault alarm and the recovery alarm may be different. Therefore, their flags are
configured individually.
It is prohibited to set a statistics flag for a threshold alarm.
3-8

3.5 Setting Alarm Threshold

When alarm statistics is enabled for a certain alarm, the system collects alarm statistics
based on different thresholds.
Alarm statistics are collected every 15 minutes and every24 hours. When the threshold
is 0, the alarm statistics wont be collected. Otherwise, a threshold alarm is generated
when the alarm counts exceed the threshold. By default, the threshold is 0.
The specific operations are as follows:
I. Set alarm threshold

The command alarm threshold is used to set the alarm threshold. For example:
MA5100(config)#alarm threshold
{ alarmid<H><0x0 , 0xffffffff> }:0x0a100064
{ threshold15m<0,65535> }:6500
{ threshold24h<0,4294967295> }:87000
An alarm threshold refers to the number of alarms that occur in a certain period of time.
A threshold alarm will be reported when the number of alarms exceeds the threshold. In
the above example, if there are more than 6500 alarms within 15 minutes, a threshold
alarm will be reported.
II. Display the configuration

The command show alarm configuration is used to display the configuration of alarm
threshold.
Note:
z
The statistics flag of the fault alarm and the recovery alarm may be different. Therefore, their flags are
configured individually.
Configure the threshold at 0 if the threshold alarm is not necessary.
3.6 Displaying Alarm Statistics

You may care about the frequency of occurrence for certain types of alarms in a period
of time. The MA5100 provides four time segments for this query: current 15 minutes,
current 24 hours, last 15 minutes and last 24 hours.
3-9

The command show alarm statistics is used to display the alarm statistics, for
example:
MA5100>show alarm statistics 0x02320000
ALARMID: 0x02320000
Current 15m Alarm Times: 1, Last 15m Alarm Times: 0, Threshold: 2
Current 24h Alarm Times: 2, Last 24h Alarm Times: 0, Threshold: 20
PARAS INFO : FrameID: 0, SlotID: 5
ALARMID: 0x02320000
Current 15m Alarm Times: 0, Last 15m Alarm Times: 0, Threshold: 2
Current 24h Alarm Times: 1, Last 24h Alarm Times: 0, Threshold: 20
PARAS INFO : FrameID: 0, SlotID: 12
3.7 Clearing Alarm Statistics

The command clear alarm statistics is used to clear the alarm statistics when the
MA5100 is being idle for long, or the statistics data has been destroyed. This command
clears all the alarm statistics information.
Note:
z
If you do not designate an alarm ID, all the alarm statistics will be deleted.
If a certain type of alarms does not occur in two days, the MA5100 will clear the statistics of these
alarms automatically.
3.8 Displaying Alarm Basic Information

The command show alarm list is used to display the basic information of an alarm,
including the alarm ID, alarm output status, alarm statistics status and alarm type.
You can display the information by specifying any of the following:
z
alarmlevel: critical, major, minor, warn.
alarmclass: event, fault, restore
alarmtype: communication, service, process, equipment, environmental
statistics: yes, no
start and end alarm ID: showing all alarms within the alarm ID range
all: showing all alarm information
The following example shows how to display the event alarms from number 1 to 4.
MA5100(config)#show alarm list
3-10

{ alarmlevel<K>|alarmtype<K>|statistics<K>|alarmclass<K>|from<K>|all<K> }:
alarmclass
{ class_value<E><event,fault,restore> }:event
{ <cr>|startnum<1,500> }:1
{ number<1,500> }:4
ALARMID
OUTPUT STATISTIC ALARM_NAME
----------------------------------------------------------0x00200000
YES
NO
15 Minutes Threshold Alarm
0x00200001
YES
NO
24 Hours Threshold alarm
0x01200000
YES
YES
Configuration data error
0x01200001
YES
YES
System configuration data init fail
3.9 Displaying Alarm History

Alarm history helps locate a fault. The command show alarm history is used to display
the alarm history.
You can display the alarm history by specifying any one from the alarm ID, alarm level,
alarm number, alarm class, alarm type, or alarm time, or display all the history alarms.
The following example shows how to display the history alarms of critical level.
MA5100(config)#show alarm history
{ alarmsn<K>|all<K>|alarmid<K>|alarmlevel<K>|type<K>|class<K>|alarmtime<K>
}:alarmlevel
{ <cr>|start-number<1,1900>|detail<K>|list<K> }:
ALARM 212695 RESTORE CRITICAL 0x0232000a EQUIPMENT 2002-08-26 16:43:32

ALARM NAME : Port of Bits is Normal
PARAS INFO : FrameID: 0, SlotID: 7, Bits Index 0
DESCRIPTION : Port of bits exist input
REASON : Bits Port become normal
ADVICE : no process
--- END
ALARM 212694 RESTORE CRITICAL 0x02320001 EQUIPMENT 2002-08-26 16:43:28

ALARM NAME : Clock source appear
PARAS INFO : FrameID: 0, SlotID: 7, Clock SourceID: 8, Clock SourceIndex:
0
DESCRIPTION : Clock source appear
REASON : Clock Port become normal
ADVICE : no process
3-11

--- END
3-12

Chapter 4 Operation And Maintenance

4.1 Overview
Operation And Maintenance (OAM) functions in the network are performed on five
OAM hierarchical levels associated with the ATM and physical layers of the protocol
reference model. The functions result in corresponding bidirectional information flows
F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5 referred to as OAM flows.
The ATM layer contains the two highest OAM levels:
z
F4: providing OAM functions at the virtual path (VP) level;
F5: providing OAM functions at the virtual channel (VC) level.
The MA5100 supports all the OAM F4 and F5 flow functions.

According to ITU-T Recommendation I.610, OAM functions in an ATM network include
performance monitoring, defect and failure detection, system protection, defect
information and fault localization. Based on the requirements for maintaining an ATM
network, OAM connection points (CPs) generate and process corresponding OAM
cells (such as AIS, RDI and CC) in the network.
4.2 Configuring OAM

The MMXC and AIUA boards of the MA5100 support the OAM function.
Before configuring the OAM function, you should first use the command interface oam
to enter the OAM configuration mode.
The following example shows how to enter the OAM configuration mode and configure
the OAM function for the MMXC port (frame 0, slot 7, port 8).
MA5100(config)#interface oam
{ fram/slot/port<S><3,8> }:0/7/8
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#
The configuration of OAM function involves these steps:

1)
Configure OAM attributes for a CP
2)
Configure loopback for a CP
3)
Activate Continuity Check (CC) function for a CP
4)
Insert OAM cell
4-1

4.2.1 Configuring OAM Attributes for a CP

The OAM attributes for a CP include the seg-middle, end-point and seg-point attributes.
z
seg-middle
A seg-middle does not terminate any cells, while end-point cells and seg-point cells can
be transmitted transparently through a seg-middle. If a seg-middle detects a fault on the
link, it will insert a seg_AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) cell and an end_AIS cell in the
forward direction.
z
end-point
An end-point terminates all OAM cells. It will not forward the OAM cells. If an end-point
detects a fault on the link, it will not insert a seg_AIS cell or an end_AIS cell in the
forward direction. Rather, it will insert an end_RDI (Remote Defect Indication) cell in the
backward direction.
z
seg-point
A seg-point does not terminate end cells, but it terminates all seg cells. If a seg-point
detects a fault on the link, it will both insert an end_AIS cell in the forward direction and
a seg_RDI cell in the backward direction.
CPs with different OAM attributes can handle the faults occurring on the ATM layer or
the physical layer by processing the AIS/RDI cells differently.
Figure 4-1 shows the flow of AIS/RDI cells.
AIS
node 1
end-point
node 2
seg-point
E2E-RDI
node 3
seg-middle
E2E-RDI
node 4
seg-point
E2E-RDI
RDI
node 5
end-point
E2E-RDI
SEG-RDI
E2E -AIS
E2E -AIS
E2E -AIS
Figure 4-1 Flow of AIS/RDI cells

When a fault is detected at node 2, the following operations will be made:
1)
Node 2 inserts E2E-AIS cell to node 3, and inserts SEG-RDI cell to node 1 at the
same time.
2)
Node 1 receives the SEG-RDI cell and terminates the cell. Node 3 receives the
E2E-AIS cell and transmits it transparently to node 4.
3)
Node 4 receives the E2E-AIS cell and transmits it transparently to node 5.
4-2

4)
Node 5 receives the E2E-AIS cell and terminates the cell, and inserts E2E-RDI cell
to node 4.
5)
The E2E-RDI cell is transmitted transparently to node 1 all the way through the
nodes 4, 3 and 2.
6)
Node 1 receives the E2E-RDI cell and terminates the cell.
7)
Finally node 5 knows that the fault occurs in the upstream node, and node 1 knows
that the fault occurs in the downstream node.
I. Configure the OAM attributes

The command atm oam attribute is used to configure OAM attributes of various sorts
of CPs.
z
Configuring the OAM attributes for a seg-point or a seg-middle at a VC end.
atm oam attribute vpi vci { {seg-point | end-point } [fmvpproen] | seg-middle }

z
Configuring the OAM attributes for a seg-point at a VP end.
atm oam attribute vpi {seg-point | end-point }

z
Configuring the OAM attributes for a seg-middle at a VP/VC segment.
atm oam attribute vpi vci seg-middle

where,
seg-point: indicates to set the CP as a seg-point.
end-point: indicates to set the CP as an end-point.
seg-middle: indicates to set the CP as a seg-middle. Once a CP is set as a seg-middle,
it will insert the SEG AIS cell and E2E AIS cell after detecting faults on the physical
layer.
fmvpproen: indicates to report the information about a fault occurring at a VP layer to
the VC layer it belongs to.
The following example shows how to set the OAM attribute of port 8 in slot 7, frame 0 to
end-point, after which the information about a fault occurring at a VP layer will be
reported to the VC layer it belongs to.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#atm oam attribute
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535>|seg-point<K>|end-point<K>|seg-middle<K> }:40
{ seg-middle<K>|seg-point<K>|end-point<K> }:end-point
{ <cr>|fmvpproen<K> }:fmvpproen
4-3

Note:
z
When configuring the OAM, make sure that the connection associated with the VPI and VCI already
exists, that is the associated PVC or PVC already exists
Note that the seg-middle can be configured within a segment. Therefore a seg-middle cannot be
configured once the associated segment does not exist.
II. View OAM attributes of various CPs

The commands show atm oam attribute and show oam are used to show
information about the OAM attributes of various CPs, including: CP configuration status,
end point type, whether a VP fault is transmitted to VC, fault management error code
type, activating cell type, alarm, FM state, and FM state transfer time, as illustrated in
the following example.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#show atm oam attribute 0 40
Configuration status
: up
End point type
: end
VP fault is transmitted to VC
: yes
Fault management error code type
: default code
Activating cell type
: end
Alarm
: native physical fault
FM sta
: ais
FM Sta Trans Time
: 2003- 7-30 11:54:11
III. Delete OAM attributes of various CPs

The command no atm oam attribute is used to delete OAM attributes of various CPs.
4.2.2 Configuring the CC Function

When the CC function is activated end-to-end or at segment level, the CC cell can carry
out continuity check over any VC/VP link.
When the receiving end/segment fails to receive any user cell or CC cell within a time
interval of 3.5 seconds, with a margin of 0.5 seconds, it will declare a Loss of
Continuity (LOC) defect and transfer from the normal state to the faulty state. Once the
receiving end/segment receives the user cell or CC cell again, it will transfer from the
faulty state to the normal state.
4-4

I. Activate/Deactivate the CC function

The command atm oam cc is used to activate the CC function of the seg-point, and the
command no atm oam cc is used to deactivate the function.
There are three methods for activating the CC function:
z
btoa: when the local end is ccsink, it indicates to receive CC cells; when the peer
end is ccsource, it indicates to insert CC cells.
atob: when the local end is ccsource, it indicates to insert CC cells; when the peer
end is ccsource, it indicates to receive CC cells.
bidirection: when the local end and peer end are ccsink/ccsource simultaneously,
it indicates to insert and receive CC cells at the same time.
In addition, you can enable automatic CC configuration or perform manual CC

configuration by selecting auto or manual. By default, auto configuration is enabled.
auto: indicates to enable automatic CC configuration, that is, you need only configure
the CC function for the local end-/seg-point. The peer end-/seg-point can automatically
carry out the CC function configuration depending on the configuration on the local end
through interaction between the local and peer end.
manual: indicates to perform manual CC configuration for both the local and peer end.
The following example shows how to activate the CC function at the segment level
bi-directionally.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#atm oam cc 0 45
{ adtype<E><seg-cc,end-cc> }:seg-cc
{ addirecton<E><btoa,atob,bidirection> }:bidirection
{ <cr>|cfgmode<E><auto,manual> }:auto
Caution:
z
The endpoint type of the CP whose CC function is activated should be consistent with the OAM
attribute configured.
Make sure the OAM attribute of a CP is configured before you activate its CC function.
The no atm oam cc command will deactive the CC function unconditionally, that is it will deactivate
the CC function of the near end no matter whether there is responses from the peer end.
The CC function cannot be deactivated during the fault correction.
If the board is in normal condition, you have to deactivate the CC function first to delete a connection.
4-5

II. View the CC function configuration

The command show atm oam cc is used to show information about the CC function
configuration.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#show atm oam cc 0 45
AD Direction
: bid
AD Cell Type
: seg
CC Status
: active
CC Type
: auto
4.2.3 Setting CP Loopback

The OAM provides the loopback test function to facilitate test and fault locating. The
loopback test means to enable loopback by originating on a VC/VP link at a CP a
loopback cell that is to be looped back by another CP. The system can detect and
locate faults by checking the received loopback cells.
The following commands are used to enable seg-point loopback, end-point loopback,
designated point loopback, and xDSL modem loopback.
atm oam loopback vpi [vci] {seg-loopback [llid llid] | end-loopback} times
seg-loopback: indicates to enable seg-point loopback.
end-loopback: indicates to enable end-point loopback.
llid: indicates to enable designated point loopback.
llid: specifies the loopback point. It is a string of up to 47 characters in the form of
xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx. 0 cannot be omitted in the input. For
example, 0a cannot be abbreviated as a. Default llid values are available for the
AIU/MMXC boards, which differ according to different slots that the boards are located.
You can either query the default llid by using the command show oam llid or use the
command oam llid to configure a llid. When this parameter is not specified, it indicates
to enable seg-point loopback.
times: specifies the loopback times, which range 1~10.
During the loopback of xDSL Modem, first you need to specify the VPI/VCI value of the
connection between the ATM and xDSL port connected with the Modem, then select
the loopback type seg-loopback/ end-loopback, and finally enter the loopback times.
4-6

Note:
z
Loopback in the same board will fail.
To enable seg-point loopback, the loopback point must be configured as seg-point.
To enable end-point loopback, the loopback point must be configured as end-point.
The designated point loopback does not require the loopback point to be set as seg-point.
The transmitting interval for each loopback cell is 5 seconds invariably.
The following example shows how to enable the designated loopback on port 8 in
slot 7 frame 0, with the VPI/VCI being 100/50.

MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#atm oam loopback 100 50
00-e0-fc-0f-4c-6b-0b-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
seg-loopback llid
LB 0/ 7/ 8 100/50 from 00-e0-fc-0f-4c-6b-0b-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff

LB 0/ 7/ 8100/50
send cell:
lost cell:
The following example shows how to configure the loopback from ATM port (0/7/8)
to ADSL Modem (0/13/11), the VPI/VCI of which is 0/35.

MA5100(config-if-oam-0/13/11)#atm oam loopback
{ vpi<0,4095> }:0
{ vci<32,65535>|end-loopback<K>|seg-loopback<K> }:35
{ end-loopback<K>|seg-loopback<K> }:end-loopback
{ times<1,10> }:5
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/13/11)#
LB 0/13/11
0/35
from ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff
LB 0/13/11
0/35
LB 0/13/11
0/35
LB 0/13/11
0/35
LB 0/13/11
0/35
LB
0/13/11
0/35
send cell:
lost cell:
4.2.4 Inserting AIS/RID/CC Cells

In usual cases, the system will send AIS cells only when receiving AIS cells, physical
layer faults, or having not received CC cells successively. However, to facilitate
commissioning, you can use the command atm oam insert to enable AIS/RID/CC cell
insertion, or use the command no atm oam insert to disable the function, and use the
command show atm oam insert to query the OAM cell insertion configuration.
4-7

The following example shows how to enable insertion of SEG AIS cells at the CP on
port 8 in slot 7 frame 0, with the VPI/VCI being 100/50.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#atm oam insert 0 45 ais seg
The following example shows how to display cell insertion information about the CP at
port 8 in slot 7 frame 0, with the VPI/VCI being 100/50.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#show atm oam insert 0 45
insert segment ais cell
The following example shows how to disable cell insertion at the CP on port 8 in slot 7
frame 0, with the VPI/VCI being 100/50.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/7/8)#no atm oam insert 0 45
Caution:
It is not allowed to insert an OAM cell directly when a CP has been configured with the OAM attributes. In
that case, you have to delete the OAM attribute configuration first.
4.3 Displaying Statistics

The command show atm oam statistics is used to show the error cell statistics.
The displayed error cell statistics include:
1)
Number of CRC error cells
2)
Number of unsupported cells
3)
Number of undefined cells
The following example shows how to query the error cell statistics about port 8 in slot 7
frame 0.
MA5100(config-if-oam-0/6/8)#show atm oam statistics cell-capture
Number of crc error cell: 0
Number of unsupported cell: 0
Number of undefined cell: 94
4-8

Chapter 5 Configuring EMU

5.1 Overview
The MA5100 environment monitor module is composed of multiple environment
monitor units (EMUs):
z
Fan frame EMU (FAN): an EMU that monitors the running of the heat-dissipation
fans and adjusts the running speed of the fans.
Power frame EMU (POWER4875/POWER4845), power distribution frame EMU

(DIS), H303ESC (POWER 4810): EMUs that control and monitor the power supply,
smoke sensor, water sensor, environmental temperature and humidity, as well as
fire.
Generally, only the power frame EMU or the power distribution frame EMU is
configured according to the power supply mode (DC or AC)
5.2 Configuration Procedures

The configuration of EMU can be divided into two major steps:
1)
Define the EMU in the global configuration mode, including the EMUID, EMU type,
physical position, and communication method with MMXC;
2)
Enter the EMU configuration mode, configure the EMU parameters and query the
reported information.
Note:
z
A maximum of five EMUs can be configured in one MA5100 cabinet.
Only one power EMU is needed in one MA5100 cabinet.
The following describes the configuration methods according to the sequences to

configure the EMUs.
5-1

5.3 Defining an EMU in Global Configuration Mode

5.3.1 Adding/Deleting/Displaying an EMU
I. Add an EMU
In the global configuration mode, the command emu add is used to add a new EMU.
The following example shows how to add an EMU FAN.
MA5100(config)#emu add 1
{ DIS<K>|H303ESC<K>|POWER4845<K>|POWER4875<K>|FAN<K> }:FAN
{ frameid<0,63> }:0
{ subnode<0,31> }:1
{ com<E><back,fore,random> }:back
{ <cr>|name<S><1,19> }:
z
com: the method for communication between the EMU and the MMXC board,
which can be back, fore and random. back means the EMU shall communicate
with the MMXC board through the backplane on the cabinet; fore means the EMU
shall communicate with the MMXC board through the serial port on the front panel
of the MMXC board; random means the EMU shall use either the back or fore
mode to communicate according to the condition type.
subnode: the subnode number. Since the MMXC board of the MA5100
communicates with the EMU through main node and subnode method, the
subnode number must be configured.
Note:
z
The subnode number for H303ESC is always 30;
The default subnodes for FAN, POWER4875, POWER4845 and DIS are 0. You can configure these
subnodes, but they must be consistent with the DIP settings on the hardware;
No subnode can conflict with each other when the system monitors multiple EMUs at the same time.
Note:
Pay attention to the following when selecting the communication method:
z
EMUs on the MA5100 slave frames can only work in random mode;
H303ESC on the main control frame can only work in fore mode;
The EMU FAN can only work in back mode;
Other EMUs in the main control frame must be in back or fore mode.
5-2

II. Display an EMU

The command show emu is used to display the IDs and running states of all the EMUs.
The following example shows how to display the information of all the EMUs.
MA5100(config)#show emu
{ <cr>|emuid<0, 63> }:
------------------------------------------------------------------ID Type
State
|ID Type
State
|ID Type
State
|ID Type
State
-----------------------------------------------------------------0 Pwr4875 Normal |16 -
|32 -
|48 -
1 FAN
Normal |17 -
|33 -
|49 -
2 -
|18 -
|34 -
|50 -
3 -
|19 -
|35 -
|51 -
4 -
|20 -
|36 -
|52 -
5 -
|21 -
|37 -
|53 -
6 -
|22 -
|38 -
|54 -
7 -
|23 -
|39 -
|55 -
8 -
|24 -
|40 -
|56 -
9 -
|25 -
|41 -
|57 -
10 -
|26 -
|42 -
|58 -
11 -
|27 -
|43 -
|59 -
12 -
|28 -
|44 -
|60 -
13 -
|29 -
|45 -
|61 -
14 -
|30 -
|46 -
|62 -
15 -
|31 -
|47 -
|63 -
--------------------------------------------------------------------
The following example shows how to display the information of EMU 1.

MA5100(config)#show emu
{ <cr>|emuid<0,63> }:1
------------------------------------------------EMU name
: -
EMU type
: FAN
Used or not : Used

EMU state
: Fault
Frame ID
: 0
Subnode
: 1
COM Port
: Back
------------------------------------------------
III. Delete an EMU

The command emu del is used to delete an EMU.
5-3

Note:
z
The EMU type cannot be changed after the configuration. If you need to change it, first delete the EMU,
and then add a new one.
If an EMU in the cabinet has been replaced, first delete the original EMU, and then add the new one.
5.3.2 Entering the EMU Configuration Mode

After an EMU has been added successfully, use the command interface emu to enter
the EMU configuration mode of such EMU for configuration.
The following example shows how to enter the configuration mode of the EMU FAN, the
EMUID of which is 1.
MA5100(config)#interface emu
{ emuid<0,63> }:1
MA5100(config-if-fan-1)#
5.4 Configuring EMU-H303ESC

5.4.1 Configuring H303ESC Environment Monitoring Parameter
I. Configure fan control parameters
The command esc fan is used to configure the status control parameters for H303ESC
fan frame. The status of the fan frame can be opened, closed or auto. The default
status control is auto, upon which the temperatures for auto-on and auto-off of the fan
must be configured. The default on and off temperatures are 45 and 30
respectively.
II. Configure the analog quantity parameters

The command esc analog is used to configure the upper and lower thresholds of
analog quantities such as temperature and humidity.
III. Configure digital quantity parameters

The command esc digital is used to configure the digital quantities such as MDF state,
entrance control state and normal state of the digital quantities.
5-4

IV. Configure extended serial port parameters

The command esc com is used to configure the extended serial port parameters,
including the baudrate and databit.
V. Configure the power module monitored by H303ESC

The command esc power must be used to add a power module before the parameters
can be configured. The power module supported at present is the 4810 power module.
VI. Configure the 4810 power module parameters

After the power module to be monitored by H303ESC has been added, you can use the
command esc 4810 to configure the power parameters.
VII. Display H303ESC system parameters

The command show esc system parameter is used to display the H303ESC system
parameters, including: fan running mode, analog quantities, digital quantities, extended
serial port parameters and power module parameters.
5.4.2 Displaying H303ESC Environment Information

I. Display 4810 power module information
The command show esc 4810 is used to display the configuration of the 4810 power
module, work status and running information.
II. Display environment information

The command show esc environment info is used to display the setting of
environment factors such as temperature, humidity, entrance control and fire sensors.
III. Display alarm information

The command show esc alarm is used to display the alarm information of the
environment factors.
5-5

5.5 Configuring EMU-FAN

5.5.1 Configuring FAN Parameters
I. Configure fan speed mode
The command fan speed mode is used to configure the speed mode of the fans.
There are three modes: fixed, automatic and manual. The default mode is
automatic.
The following example shows how to change the mode to fixed.
MA5100(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed mode
{ mode<E><fixed,automatic,manual> }:fixed
II. Configure fan speed adjustment

The command fan speed adjust is used to configure the speed adjustment mode of
the fans. This command is valid only when the fan speed mode is manual.
The following example shows how to configure the fan speed as 50% of the highest
speed.
MA5100(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed adjust
{ speed_value<E><up,down,high,low>|speed_value<K> }:speed_value
{ speed_value<50,100> }:50
III. Enable/disable fan alarms

The command fan alarmset is used to enable or disable the report of fan alarms to the
main control unit. The fan alarms include the followings:
z
0: communication failure alarm;
1: reading temperature sensor 1820 failure alarm;
2: fan blocked alarm;
3: high-temperature alarm;
4: hardware failure alarm
The following example shows how to enable the report of the fan blocked alarm to the
main control unit.
MA5100(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset
{ alarm_name<E><0:commu,1:read_tem_fault,2:block,3:tem_high,4:fault> }:2
{ permit_or_forbid<E><permit,forbid> }:permit
5-6

IV. Display fan frame configuration

The command show fan system parameter is used to display the configuration
parameters of the fan frame, including the fan speed adjustment mode and alarm report
status.
MA5100(config-if-fan-1)#show fan system parameter
EMU ID: 1
Fan configuration parameter
-------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: manual timing

timing info: manual timing mode: OCC
alarm_name
value: 50
permit/forbid
communication fault
permit
read temperature fault
permit
fan block
permit
temperature high
permit
board fault
permit
-------------------------------------------------------------------
5.5.2 Displaying the Information Reported by EMU-FAN

I. Display the running information of the fans
The command show fan environment info is used to display the running information
of the fans.
II. Display the alarm information of the fan frame

The command show fan alarm is used to display the alarm information of the fans.
5.6 Configuring EMU-POWER 4875/4845

5.6.1 Configuring POWER4875/4845
I. Configure the backup analog quantities of 4875 power module
The command power analog-backup is used to configure the backup analog
quantities of the 4875 power module.
II. Configure 4875/4845 battery parameters

The command power battery is used to configure the management and temperature
parameters of the battery that connects with the 4875/4845 power modules.
5-7

III. Configure 4875/4845 battery charging parameters

The command power charge is used to configure the charging parameters for the
battery that connects with the 4875/4845 battery, including the charging mode and
charging voltage.
IV. Configure 4875/4845 environment parameters

The command power environment is used to configure the environment parameters
of the 4875/4845 power module, including the temperature and humidity.
V. Configure the quantity of 4875/4845 power module

The command power module-num is used to configure the quantity of 4875/4845
power module.
VI. Configure 4875/4845 on/off control

The command power module-parameter is used to configure the on/off status control
of the 4875/4845 power module. By default, the power module is on, which means the
power module is in the state to supply the power.
VII. Configure 4875/4845 power-off threshold

The power off occurs in two cases: load power-off and battery power-off.
When the mains supply is off, the MA5100 cabinet will be powered by the batteries. If
the output voltage of the batteries drops under the load power-off threshold, the power
for the traffic load will be cut off. If the output voltage of the batteries keeps dropping
and goes below the battery power-off threshold, the batteries will stop working.
The command power off is used to configure the power-off thresholds for the load and
the batteries. Note that the 4875 power module does not support the load power-off
function.
Observe the following rules in the configuration:
z
DC over-voltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging voltage >
DC under-voltage > load power-off voltage > battery power-off voltage
DC over-voltage > (float charging voltage + 2)
Float charging voltage > (DC under-voltage + 2)
VIII. Configure 4875/4845 power supply parameter

The command power supply-parameter is used to configure the power distribution
parameters of the 4875/4845 power module, including the over-voltage/under-voltage
alarm thresholds for AC and DC power supplies.
5-8

IX. Configure 4875/4845 power backup digital quantities

The command power digital-backup is used to configure the backup digital quantities
of the 4875/4845 power module.
X. Configure 4845 power-off temperature

The command power temperature-off is used to configure the power-off temperature
for the 4845 power module.
5.6.2 Displaying Various Information of POWER4875/4845

I. Display 4875/4845 power alarm information
The command show power alarm is used to display the alarm information of the
4875/4845 power module.
II. Display 4875/4845 power environment information

The command show power environment info is used to display the environment
information of the 4875/4845 power module.
III. Display 4875/4845 power environment parameters

The command show power environment parameter is used to display the
environment parameters of the 4875/4845 power module.
IV. Display 4875/4845 power running information

The command show power run info is used to display the running information of the
4875/4845 power module.
V. Display 4875/4845 power system parameters

The command show power system parameter is used to display the 4875/4845
power system parameters.
5-9

5.7 Configuring EMU-DIS

5.7.1 Configuring DIS Parameters
I. Enable/supress DIS alarm parameters
The command distribution alarmset is used to enable or suppress the DIS alarm
parameters. The DIS alarm parameters include: temperature and humidity of the power
distribution frame, -48V input to the frame, internal/external sensors for digital
quantities, and sensors for analog quantities.
II. Configure buzzers for the power distribution frame

The command distribution buzzers is used to open or close the buzzer on the power
distribution frame.
III. Configure the alarm parameters

z
The command distribution humidity is used to set the upper and lower threshold
of humidity alarm.
The command distribution temperature is used to set the upper and lower
threshold of temperature alarm.
The command distribution input is used to configure the upper and lower
threshold of -48V input to the power distribution frame.
The command distribution outside_analog is used to configure the parameters

of external sensors of the power distribution frame for analog quantities.
The command distribution outside_digital is used to configure the parameters

of external sensors of the power distribution frame for digital quantities.
The command distribution lamp is used to set the lamp parameter of the cabinet.
5.7.2 Displaying DIS Information

I. Display the configuration parameter of distribution frame
The command show distribution system parameter is used to display the
configuration parameters of the distribution frame.
II. Display the environment prarmeter of distribution frame

The command show distribution environment info is used to display the
environment parameters of the distribution frame.
5-10
HUAWEI

Module
Operation Manual
Part 4 Appendix

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................A-1

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

AAL1
AAL5
ADSL
ATM
ATU-R
BAS
BITS
CAR
CBR
CELL BUS
CES
CLI
CPE
CRC
DCE
DDN
DLCI
DMT
DSLAM
DTE
EMC
ESC
EPD
FE
FR
FTP
GE
GUI
HDLC
HTTP
IMA
IGMP
IPoA
ISDN
ITU-T
IWF
LAN
LOS
LVDS
MA
MAC
MII
MMX
NNI
nrt-VBR
OAM
OC-3
OLT
ONU
PBX
PCM
POTS
PPD
PPP
ATM Adaptation Layer 1

ATM Adaptation Layer 5
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ADSL transceiver unit remote end
Broadband Access Server
Building Integrated Timing Supply System
Committed Access Rate
Constant Bit Rate
Cell Bus
Circuit Emulation Service
Command Line interface
Customer Premises Equipment
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
Digital Data Network
Data Link Connection Identifier
Discrete Multi-Tone
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
Digital Terminal Equipment
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Environment Supervision Circuit
Early Packet Discard
Fast Ethernet
Frame Relay
File Transfer Protocol
Gigabit Ethernet
Graphic User Interface
High Data Link Control
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
Internet Group Management Protocol
Internet Protocols Over ATM
Integrated Service Digital Network
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
InterWorking Function
Local Area Network
Loss Of Signal
Low Voltage Differential Signal
Media Service Access
Media Access Control
Media Independent Interface
Main Multiplex Card
Network-Network Interface
non-real time Variable Bit Rate
Operation Administration and Maintenance
OC-3
Optical Line Terminal
Optical Network Unit
Private Branch Exchange
Pulse Code Modulation
Plain Old Telephone Service
Partial Packet Discard
Point to Point Protocol
A-1

PPPoA
PPPoE
PSTN
PVC
PVP
QoS
RTU
rt-VBR
SAR
SDH
SDT
SNMP
SEP
SMX
SOHO
SPL
STM-1
TC-PAM
TCP/IP
TFTP
TDM
UBR
UDT
UNI
UPC
UTOPIA
VBR
VC
VCC
VCI
VLAN
VOD
VP
VPI
VPN
WAN
xDSL
PPP over ATM

PPP over Ethernet
Public Switched Telephone Network
Permanent Virtual Connection
Permanent Virtual Path
Quality of Service
Remote Terminal Unit
real time Variable Bit Rate
Segmentation And Reassembly
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Structured Data Transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol
System Expand Card
Slave Multiplex Card
Small Office Home Office
Splitter
Synchronous Transport Mode-1
Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation
Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Time Division Multiplex
Unspecified Bit Rate
Unstructured Data Transfer
User Network Interface
Usage Parameter Control
Universal Test & Operations PHY Interface for ATM
Variable Bit Rate
Virtual Connection
Virtual Channel Connection
Virtual Channel Identifier
Virtual LAN
Video on Demand
Virtual Path
Virtual Path Identifier
Virtual Private Network
Wide Area Network
x Digital Subscriber Line
A-2

MA5100 5103 Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA5100 5103 Operation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HUAWEI

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service Access Module

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service Access Module

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright 2003 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

About This Manual

SmartAX MA5100 Multi-service Access

It provides an overall introduction to the MA5100, including the

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service

It guides you to configure the system parameters and typical

SmartAX MA5100 Multi-service Access

It guides you to install the MA5100, including the installation of the

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service

It provides all commands available in the MA5100/MA5103, as

SmartAX Documentation CD-ROM

It provides the user documentation in HTML and PDF formats to

SmartAX MA5103 Multi-service Access

It provides an overall introduction to the MA5103.

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service

It guides you to configure the system parameters and typical

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service

It provides all commands available in the MA5100/MA5103, as

SmartAX Documentation CD-ROM

It provides the user documentation in HTML and PDF formats to

Organization of the Manual

Maintenance staff of the SmartAX MA5100/5103;

Administrators and technicians operating with the MA5100/5103;

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Headings are in Boldface.

Terminal Display is in Courier New.

II. Command conventions

The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

Command arguments are in italic.

Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by

III. GUI conventions

Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,

IV. Keyboard operation

Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

SmartAX MA5100/5103 Multi-service Access

Part 1 Basic Operation

Operation Manual Basic Operation

Operation Manual Basic Operation

4.1.7 Configuring Serial Port Baudrate ............................................................................ 4-4

Operation Manual Basic Operation

9.1.1 Configuring IP Address for the ETH Port ................................................................ 9-2

Operation Manual Basic Operation

Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration

Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration

1.1 Connecting and Configuring Serial Port Terminal

1.1.1 Configuring Local Serial Port Terminal

Operation Manual Basic Operation

Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration

Select [Start/Program/Accessories/HyperTerminal] on the terminal to set up the

Figure 1-2 Selecting the serial port number

Operation Manual Basic Operation

Chapter 1 Terminal Configuration